Chery T15 User Manual

FOREWORD
Thank you very much for purchasing a new Chery vehicle!

To know how to correctly operate and maintain your vehicle, please take time to
read this manual carefully.
After you read this manual, please leave it in the vehicle for future refer-
ence. Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the same time of resale, as
the new owner will also need to read the information in it.
All the information and specifications in this manual are current at the
time of printing. Chery Automobile Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications at any time without notice.
Chery authorized dealers are exclusively authorized by Chery Automobile Co.,
Ltd., and will provide you with professional high-quality services. Remember that
Chery authorized dealers know your vehicle best, and they have factory-trained
technicians and OEM parts which will guarantee your satisfaction. This vehicle
should not be modified with non OEM parts or accessories. Modification could
affect vehicle performance, safety or durability.
Depending on specificality of equipment and features of your vehicle,
some descriptions and illustrations may differ from the equipment found
on your vehicle.
All data, descriptions and illustrations provided in this manual cannot
serve as the basis for lodging a claim.
Please visit our website for further information.
Website: www.cheryinternational.com
© 2017 Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. This document should not be reproduced or copied, in whole
or in part, without the written permission of Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
1
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................25
Section 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL..........................................37
Section 3 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS.............................79
Section 4 STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE.................147
Section 5 FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .......................227
Section 6 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY .........................349
Section 7 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................379
Section 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ..........................385
Section 9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS..............................423
INDEX.................................................................441
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX
Time and Overspeed Alarm

1 INTRODUCTION Settings ............................. 66
2-3. Warning Lights and

1-1. How to Read This Manual .....26
Indicators ........................... 68
Table of Contents ..................26
Charging System Warning
Pictorial Index ........................26 Light................................... 68
Index ......................................26 Daytime Running Light
Indicator............................. 69
1-2. Symbols in the Manual ..........27 Front Fog Light Indicator ....... 69
Rear Fog Light Indicator........ 69
1-3. New Vehicle Inspection .........28
Headlight High Beam
Vehicle Delivery Card ............28 Indicator............................. 69
Owner Registration High Coolant Temperature
Certificate...........................30 Warning Light .................... 69
Position Light Indicator.......... 70
1-4. "Person-to-Person"
EPC Warning Light................ 70
Service ...............................31
Engine Malfunction Warning
"Person-to-Person" Advisory Light................................... 70
Service ...............................32 Low Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light .................... 71
1-5. Vehicle Modification...............35
Turn Signal Indicator ............. 71
SRS Warning Light................ 72
2 INSTRUMENT PANEL Driver Seat Belt Reminder
Light................................... 72
2-1. Instrument Panel Overview....38 Brake System Warning
Light/EBD Malfunction
CVT Configure Overview .......38
Indicator............................. 72
DCT Configure Overview.......40
ABS Warning Light................ 73
MT Configure Overview .........42
Front Passenger Seat Belt
Reminder Light
2-2. Instrument Cluster .................44 (if equipped) ...................... 74
Speedometer .........................45 ESP Warning Light................ 74
Tachometer............................45 ESP OFF Indicator ................ 74
Fuel Gauge ............................46 Low Fuel Level Warning
Engine Coolant Temperature Light................................... 75
Gauge ................................46 Electric Power Steering
Driver Information Center ......48 System Warning Light
(if equipped) ...................... 75
4
Cruise Indicator......................75 3-5. Anti-theft System................... 97
Transmission Malfunction Engine Immobilizer
Warning Light (DCT/CVT System .............................. 97
Model) ................................76 Vehicle Anti-theft System ...... 97
Parking Brake Indicator .........76
Tire Pressure Malfunction 3-6. Horn .................................... 100 1
Indicator (if equipped) ........76
3-7. Steering Wheel.................... 101
OPERATION 2
3 Adjusting Steering Wheel.... 101
INSTRUCTIONS
3-8. Windows.............................. 102
3-1. Key.........................................80
Power Windows .................. 102 3
Engine (Ignition) Switch .........80
Window Lock Switch ........... 107
Smart Key ..............................81
Replace Smart Key
3-9. Hood.................................... 108 4
Battery................................83
3-2. Keyless Entry & Start 3-10. Fuel Tank Cap..................... 110
System ...............................86 5
3-11. Seat belts ............................ 113
Antenna Location and
Effective Range..................87 Seat Belt Reminder Light .... 113
Correct Use of Seat Belt ..... 114
6
3-3. Locking and Unlocking Maintenance of Seat Belt .... 115
Doors..................................90 Fastening and Releasing
Locking and Unlocking Seat Belt.......................... 116
7
Doors with Wireless Type of Three-point Seat
Remote Control Belts ................................ 116
Function .............................90 Seat Belt Shoulder Anchor
Locking and Unlocking Height Adjuster 8
Doors with the (Front Seats) ................... 117
Mechanical Key..................91 Rear Center Seat Belt ......... 118
Opening Back Door ...............91 Stow Rear Seat Belt 9
Buckles............................ 119
3-4. Door Locks.............................94 Front Seat Belt
Door Locks.............................94 Pretensioners
Rear Door Child-protection (if equipped) .................... 119
Locks..................................96 Seat Belt Usage and
Precautions for
Children ........................... 121
5
Seat Belt Usage and 4-2. Starting Engine.................... 154

Precautions for Pregnant Preparation Before
Women.............................121 Starting ............................ 154
Normal Starting
3-12. Airbag System SRS .............123 Procedure........................ 154
SRS Warning Light ..............123 After Starting ....................... 155
Airbag System SRS .............124 Turning Off Engine .............. 155
Driver Airbag and Front Starting and Stopping
Passenger Airbag ............125 Engine in an
Airbag Precautions ..............127 Emergency ...................... 156
Modification and Disposal
of Airbag System 4-3. Continuously Variable
Components.....................130 Transmission (CVT)......... 159
Gear Position
3-13. Child Restraint System ........131 Description ...................... 159
Types of Child Restraint
System .............................131 4-4. Dual Clutch Transmission
(DCT) ............................... 164
3-14. Installing Child Restraints
Gear Position
System .............................134 Description ...................... 164
Installation with Three-point ECO/Sport Mode................. 168
Type Seat Belt .................134 Fail-safe Mode .................... 169
Precautions for Installing
Child Restraint System on
4-5. Manual Transmission .......... 170
Front Passenger Seat ......142
Installation of Child Restraint Gear Shifting ....................... 171
with Anchors (ISO-FIX Shifting Hints ....................... 171
Child Restraint Downshifting........................ 172
System)............................143
Child Restraint Systems 4-6. Brake System...................... 173
with a Top Strap...............144 Parking Brake...................... 173
Brake................................... 174
STARTING AND DRIVING
4 Vacuum Booster.................. 175
VEHICLE
Brake Fluid .......................... 175
4-1. Engine (Ignition) Switch Brake System Warning
Light................................. 176
(Keyless Entry & Start
System) ............................150 Operation Precautions ........ 177
Loss of Brake
Electric Steering Column
Effectiveness ................... 178
Lock (for MT Model).........152
6
4-7. Anti-lock Brake System System Malfunction
(ABS)................................179 Warning ........................... 193
Operation Precautions .........179 Low Pressure Warning........ 194
ABS Braking ........................181 High Temperature
Warning ........................... 195
ABS Warning Light ..............182 1
4-13. Parking Sensor Assistant
4-8. Electronic Stability Program
System (PAS) .................. 196
(ESP)................................183
Parking Sensor Assistant 2
ESP Warning Light ..............183
System (4-sensor) ........... 196
ESP OFF Switch..................184
Parking Sensor Assistant
Hill Hold Control System System (8-sensor)
(HHC)...............................185 3
(if equipped) .................... 198
Hydraulic Brake Assist PAS Switch ......................... 199
System (HBA) ..................185
Instructions for Use ............. 201
Traction Control System 4
Cleaning Parking Sensor .... 204
(TCS) ...............................185
4-14. Panoramic View Monitor
4-9. Hydraulic Power Steering
System (if equipped)........ 205 5
System .............................186
Camera Distribution ............ 205
Power Steering Fluid ...........186
Turning On and Off
Panoramic View Monitor 6
4-10. Electric Power Steering
System ............................ 206
System (EPS)
Switching One-sided and
(if equipped) .....................187
Surrounding View ............ 207 7
Three-dimensional
4-11. Constant Speed Cruising.....188
Surrounding Roaming ..... 208
Operating Procedure ...........188 Three-dimensional
Adjusting Set Speed ............189 Left/Right Side View ........ 208 8
Canceling/Resuming Static/Dynamic Reverse
Cruise Control ..................190 Guideline ......................... 209
Situations Unsuitable for Local View of Rear Area ..... 210 9
Cruise Control ..................191
4-15. Operation Safety
4-12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Precautions...................... 211
System (TPMS)
Before Starting Engine ........ 211
(if equipped) .....................192
After Starting Engine ........... 212
TPMS Display ......................192 When Driving....................... 213
Operations for Parking ........ 213
7
Parking on Slope .................214 System Setting .................... 269

Carrying Passengers ...........215 Steering Wheel Quick
Locking Vehicle....................215 Buttons ............................ 276
Exhaust Gas ........................216
5-2. Air Conditioning System...... 277
Checking Exhaust
System .............................216 Automatic Air Conditioning
System (if equipped) ....... 277
4-16. Off-road Driving AUTO Switch....................... 279
Precautions ......................217 Air Conditioning Interface
Display Button ................. 281
4-17. Driving in the Rain ...............218 Front Defrosting Button ....... 282
When Driving on Slippery OFF Switch ......................... 283
Road Surfaces .................218 DUAL Switch ....................... 283
Driving Through Water.........219 Left/Right Temperature
Adjustment Knob ............. 284
4-18. Winter Driving ......................221 Blower Governer Switch...... 286
Winter Driving Tips ..............221 Mode Switch........................ 286
Driving on Road Covered A/C Switch........................... 289
with Ice and Snow............222 Outside/Recirculated Air
Tire Chains ..........................223 Mode Switch.................... 290
Air Outlets Airflow
4-19. How to Save Fuel and Control............................. 291
Extend Life of Vehicle.......224 Electric Air Conditioning
System ............................ 294
FEATURES OF YOUR Electric Air Conditioning
5
VEHICLE Control Interface on
Audio Head Unit .............. 294
5-1. Audio System.......................230 Air Conditioning Interface
Audio Control Panel.............230 Display Button ................. 295
FM........................................236 Front Defrosting Button ....... 296
Multimedia ...........................238 OFF Switch ......................... 297
Communication....................247 Air Volume Adjustment
Cloudrive Interconnection ....253 Knob ................................ 298
Cloudrive Interconnection Temperature Adjustment
Operating Method ............258 Knob ................................ 299
Common Questions of Mode Switch........................ 299
Cloudrive A/C Switch........................... 300
Interconnection ................264 Outside/Recirculated Air
Supported File Formats .......265 Mode Button .................... 300
8
Precautions When Using Air Front Doorsill Light
Conditioning System ........301 (if equipped) .................... 329
Courtesy Light
5-3. Rear Window and Outside (if equipped) .................... 329
Rear View Mirror Luggage Compartment
Defogger...........................302 Light................................. 330 1
5-4. Rear View Mirror..................303 5-9. Power Outlet ....................... 331

Inside Rear View Mirror .......303 2
Power Outside Rear View 5-10. Cigarette Lighter and
Mirror................................304 Ashtray............................. 332
3
5-5. Wipers and Washer 5-11. Cup Holders ........................ 334
System .............................307
Front Wipers Operation 5-12. Sun Visors and Vanity
Mirrors.............................. 335 4
Instructions.......................307
Front Washers Operation
Instructions.......................309 5-13. Assist Grips and Rear
Rear Wiper Operation Center Armrest ................ 336 5
Instructions.......................310
Rear Washer Operation 5-14. Panoramic Moon Roof
Instructions.......................310 (if equipped)..................... 337 6
5-6. Seats....................................312 5-15. Storage Space .................... 341

Front Seats ..........................312 Glove Box............................ 341 7
Rear Seats...........................315 Center Console Storage
Head Restraints ...................316 Box .................................. 341
Storage Box (without Seat
8
5-7. Seat Heater (if equipped).....318 Heating)........................... 342
Storage Box Tray ................ 342
5-8. Lights ...................................320 Card Slots ........................... 342
9
Headlight Combination Door Storage Boxes............ 343
Switch ..............................320 Seat Storage Bag................ 344
Turn signal lights..................324 Glasses Box ........................ 344
Daytime Running Lights.......325 Ticket Holder ....................... 344
Fog Lights ............................325 Luggage Compartment ....... 345
Headlight Leveling ...............327 Luggage Compartment
Interior Lights .......................328 Storage Boxes................. 346
9
Roof Carrier 6-8. Jump-starting ...................... 374

(if equipped) .....................346 Jump-starting
Fixing hook ..........................346 Procedures ...................... 375
Luggage Stowage
Precautions ......................348 CUSTOMER
7
ASSISTANCE
IN CASE OF AN
6
EMERGENCY 7-1. Service for Your Vehicle...... 380
Service Arrangements......... 380
6-1. Hazard Light ........................350
Service List.......................... 380
Service Requests ................ 380
6-2. If You have a Flat Tire
When Driving....................351 7-2. If You Need Assistance....... 381
Required Tools and Service Satisfaction............. 381
Spare Tire ........................352
Service of Chery Authorized
Preparation for Jacking Up Service Station ................ 381
Vehicle .............................353
Tire Replacement ................353 7-3. After-Sales Service
Department of Chery
6-3. If Your Vehicle
International ..................... 382
Overheats.........................360
Contact Method................... 382
6-4. Replacing Fuses ..................362 Communicate
Information ...................... 383
6-5. If Your Vehicle Needs to MAINTENANCE
be Towed..........................364 8
SCHEDULES
Towing Precautions .............364
Emergency Towing ..............366 8-1. Maintenance........................ 386
Installing Towing Eyelet .......368 Maintenance Schedules...... 386
Airbag System..................... 387
6-6. Removing and Installing
Battery ..............................370 8-2. Do-it-yourself
Maintenance .................... 391
6-7. If Your Vehicle cannot Start Engine Compartment
Normally ...........................372 Overview ......................... 392
Simple Checks.....................372 Engine Compartment Fuse
Starting a Flooded and Relay Box ................. 393
Engine..............................372 Instrument Panel Fuse and
Relay Box ........................ 396
10
Checking Engine Oil
VEHICLE
Level ................................398 9
SPECIFICATIONS
Checking Transmission
Oil Level ...........................400
9-1. Vehicle Identification
Checking Brake Fluid
Number ............................ 424 1
Level ................................400
Checking Coolant Level.......401
9-2. Vehicle Specifications ......... 427
Checking Power Steering
Fluid Level Vehicle Model and Type...... 427 2
(if equipped) .....................402 Vehicle Dimensions............. 428
Checking Radiator and Vehicle Weight .................... 429
Condenser .......................403 Vehicle Performance........... 430
3
Checking Drive Belt Engine Performance ........... 431
Tension ............................403 Continuously Variable
Checking Tire Inflation Transmission ................... 432
Pressure...........................403 4
Manual Transmission .......... 433
Checking Tires.....................405 Double Clutch
Tire Rotation ........................406 Transmission ................... 433
Checking Battery .................407 Fuel System ........................ 434 5
Checking Fuse.....................407 Lubrication System.............. 435
Adding Windshield Washer Cooling System ................... 436
Fluid .................................409 Ignition System.................... 436 6
Checking Wiper Blade .........409 Suspension System ............ 436
Replacing Wiper Blade ........410 Steering System.................. 437
Checking and Replacing Brake System...................... 437 7
Air Conditioning Filter
Wheel Alignment ................. 438
Element............................411
Tires and Wheels ................ 438
Replacing Light Bulbs ..........413
Fluid Capacity ..................... 439 8
Low/High Beam Headlight
Manual Adjustment ..........418 Battery................................. 439
8-3. Vehicle Cleaning and INDEX 9

Maintenance.....................420
Alphabetical Index............... 441
8-4. New Vehicle Break-in ..........422
11
Pictorial Index Exterior
Front washer nozzle P. 309

Front wiper P. 410
Panoramic moon roof* P. 337

Front turn signal light P. 413
Side turn signal light P. 413
Radar sensor* P. 198

Outside rear view mirror P. 305
Hood P. 108 Fuel filler cap P. 110
Front towing
eyelet hole P. 368
Door P. 91
Front camera* P. 205

Left camera* P. 205
Front fog light P. 413
Tire
High/low beam light P. 413
Rotation P. 406
Replacement P. 353
Daytime running light/Position light P. 413
Inflation pressure P. 413
*: If equipped
12
Rear washer nozzle P. 310
Rear window defroster P. 302 Position light P. 414
High mounted stoplight P. 414 Stop light P. 414
Rear wiper P. 410

Roof luggage carrier P. 346
Back door switch P. 86
Monitor camera* P. 206

Rear turn light P. 414
License plate light P. 414
Rear fog light* P. 414
Reversing Back-up light P. 414

radar sensor P. 196
Rear towing eyelet hole P. 369
*: If equipped
13
Pictorial Index Instrument panel (for CVT model)
Wiper and
washer switch P. 307
Shift lever P. 159
Steering wheel P. 101
Seat Heating Switch* P. 318
A/C center outlet P. 291

Cruise control buttons* P. 188
Front windshield
Adjustment button P. 189
defrosting outlet P. 287
Telephone button* P. 276
Solar sensor* P. 280
Audio quick buttons P. 276 Front passenger

airbag P. 125
Cup holder P. 334 Glove box P. 341
Parking brake lever P. 173 Power outlet P. 331
Ashtray P. 332 Storage box tray P. 342
Engine (ignition) switch P. 150
Steering wheel adjustment lever P. 101
*: If equipped
14
Instrument panel (for MT model)
Wiper and
Storage box* P. 342

Front windshield

airbag P. 125
Shift lever P. 170
*: If equipped
15
Pictorial Index Instrument panel (for DCT model)
Wiper and
Shift lever P. 164
Seat Heater Switch* P. 318

Front windshield

airbag P. 125
*: If equipped
16
Instrument panel
Hazard light switch P. 350 Bluetooth telephone button P. 247

Cloudrive button P. 253 Audio system P. 230
Main menu button P. 233 SET button P. 269
Brake pedal A/C center outlet P. 291
Front passenger
Instrument cluster P. 44 airbag P. 125
Horn switch P. 100 A/C side

outlet P. 292
Driver airbag P. 125
Headlight combination Side defrosting
switch P. 320 outlet P. 287
B C
A
Card slot P. 342 Inside temperature

sensor* P. 280
Hood release lever P. 108
Center console
Accelerator pedal storage box P. 341
*: If equipped
17
Pictorial Index Instrument panel
A For automatic air conditioning system*
Volume adjustment knob P. 232

Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defroster switch P. 302
Front defrosting button P. 282
Temperature
adjustment knob P. 284
Temperature
OFF switch P. 283
Air conditioning
lnterface display button P. 295 AUTO switch P. 279
ECO/Sport Mode P. 168 Power button P. 232
*: If equipped
18
A For electrical air conditioning system*
Volume adjustment knob P. 232

Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defroster switch P. 302
Front defrosting button P. 296
Temperature
Air volume
OFF switch P. 297
AC
Air conditioning
lnterface display button P. 295 AC switch P. 300
ECO/Sport mode P. 168 Power button P. 232
*: If equipped
19
Pictorial Index Instrument panel
B
Driver's power
window switch P. 102
Front passenger's
power window
Window lock switch P. 107 switch P. 102
Rear left power

Power door lock

and unlock switch P. 94
Rear right power

20
C
PAS switch* P. 199
Rear view mirror folding switch* P. 305
Headlight leveling dial P. 327
3
2 OFF
AVM
Power outside rear view mirror P. 304

adjustment switch
ESP OFF switch* P. 184
AVM switch* P. 206

*: If equipped
21
Pictorial Index Interior
Sunshade switch* P. 339

Vanity mirror light P. 335
Vanity mirror P. 335 Front interior light P. 328
Moon roof switch* P. 338

Sun visor P. 335
Inside rear view mirror P. 303 Glasses box P. 344
*: If equipped
22
Rear power window switch P. 102
Door inside lock knob P. 94
Head restraint P. 316 Rear door pocket P. 343
Assist grip P. 336

Front seat P. 312
Seat storage bag P. 344

Seat belt P. 113
Rear A/C outlet P. 293

Rear seat P. 315
23
Pictorial Index luggage compartment
Luggage cover P. 345

Back door emergency
release switch P. 93
Back door P. 91
Fixing hook P. 345
Storage box P. 346

Anchor bracket P. 144
Luggage Compartment Light P. 417
Spare tire and tools P. 352
24
Section 1 INTRODUCTION
1-1. How to Read This

Manual ............................ 26
Table of Contents ............... 26
Pictorial Index ..................... 26
Index ................................... 26
1-2. Symbols in the Manual ....... 27
1-3. New Vehicle Inspection ...... 28

Vehicle Delivery Card ......... 28
Owner Registration
Certificate........................ 30
1-4. "Person-to-Person"
Service ............................ 31
"Person-to-Person"
Advisory Service ............. 32
1-5. Vehicle Modification............ 35
25
Section 1. INTRODUCTION
1-1. How to Read This Manual
There are three methods available for you to find the information you
need in this manual. Here is a brief introduction of each method.
Table of Contents
In this manual, there is a general "Table of Contents" for all the

sections and their main contents. In each section, you can also find
contents for important parts relevant to specific section.
Consult the general "Table of Contents" to determine which section of
the Owner's Manual contains the information you need and the
"Contents" to determine its accurate location.
Pictorial Index
This manual provides numerous illustrations which enable you to

have an intuitive understanding of the vehicle. The "Pictorial Index" is
a helpful assistant to quickly find the required information, especially
when you are not familiar with component name.
Index
This is the fastest method for you to find the information you need.
The index contains a complete listing of all the important vehicle
terminologies. For detailed information about the index, please refer
to Page 453.
26
1-2. Symbols in the Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to draw your

attention to the information of particular importance. In order to
minimize the risks as much as possible, please read these symbol
instructions carefully before driving, and make sure to follow them.
1
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in

damage to your property, death or personal injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in

damage to your vehicle and its equipment, or may shorten the service life.
SAFETY SYMBOL
Do not ...
Environmental Protection
Indicates that the waste must be handled or disposed of properly according to

the local environmental protection regulations, otherwise, the environment will
be contaminated.
WARNING and CAUTION in this manual regarding personal safety and

vehicle protection are especially important. Make sure that you and all
passengers follow these instructions carefully. Doing so will help you to
enjoy driving and also keep the vehicle in good condition.
27
1-3. New Vehicle Inspection
Prior to your purchase, the Chery authorized service station has

inspected your vehicle according to the regulations of Chery
Automobile Co., Ltd. The service station will record the delivery date
and affix its official seal to the Owner Registration Certificate. Before
you sign the Owner Registration Certificate, the authorized dealer
will provide you with instructions regarding your vehicle's overall
performance and some basic knowledge about its features and
regular operation according to the Vehicle Delivery Card.
Vehicle Delivery Card
Category No. Items Confirmed Operation

1 Engine Yes □ No □
Engine oil, brake fluid, power steering fluid (if
2 Yes □ No □
equipped), coolant and windshield washer fluid
Signs such as VIN, engine number and
3 Yes □ No □
nameplate etc.
4 Complete set of vehicle keys Yes □ No □
Headlights, turn signal lights, fog lights, position
lights, interior lights, stop lights, back-up lights,
5 backlights, license plate lights, front door Yes □ No □
opening warning light, luggage compartment
Vehicle light and daytime running lights
Performance
6 Windshield and painted surfaces Yes □ No □
7 Speedometer, tachometer and odometer Yes □ No □
Tires, spare tires, onboard tools and owner's
8 Yes □ No □
manual
Seats, seat belts, cigarette lighter, A/C switch
9 Yes □ No □
and air outlet, glove box and sun visors
Windows, rear view mirrors, windshield wipers,
windshield washer, battery, reversing radar
10 Yes □ No □
system, horns, moon roof (if equipped), audio
device and antenna
28
Category No. Items Confirmed Operation

1 Octane Number 92 or higher Yes □ No □
2 Normal operation during the break-in period Yes □ No □
3 Operation of all the vehicle lights Yes □ No □
Understanding of warning lights and indicator 1
4 Yes □ No □
lights
Correct time/mileage of the maintenance
INTRODUCTION
Basic 5 Yes □ No □
knowledge schedule
about 6 Vehicle maintenance in winter/summer Yes □ No □
operation Thorough understanding of the cooling system
7 Yes □ No □
and normal use of the coolant
8 Correct operation of the air conditioning Yes □ No □
9 Precautions for starting the vehicle Yes □ No □
10 Correct operation of the audio system Yes □ No □
11 Correct use of moon roof (if equipped) Yes □ No □
Signature of Sales Clerk: Date: Signature of Customer: Date:
29
Owner Registration Certificate
Model
Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN)
Engine Number or Transmission
Number
Vehicle Registration Number
Seal of Dealer:
Signature of Dealer:
Delivery Date
User
Address
E-mail
Tel.
The following items have been provided and explained:

• VEHICLE
• OWNER'S MANUAL
• PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
Signature of Customer:
Signature of Dealer:
30
1-4. "Person-to-Person" Service
The Chery authorized dealer will provide a personal service advisor

for you during you purchase your vehicle. If you have any questions
concerning your vehicle, please consult the advisor.
INTRODUCTION
31
"Person-to-Person" Advisory Service
Sheet One Kept by Customer

Name of Customer: Date of Purchase:
Dealer of Sales & Service: Model: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN):
The following items should be confirmed by the customer:
1. Vehicle Delivery and Inspection (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
Have introduced the basic operation of the vehicle to the customer and performed the
□ delivery inspection.
□ Have explained the warranty terms to the customer.

□ Have explained the precautions of driving to the customer.
□ Have explained the importance of regular maintenance and the maintenance schedule.
Have explained the importance of having regular maintenance performed at a Chery
□ authorized dealer.
□ Have delivered the Owner's Manual to the customer and reminded him/her to read it.
Have told the service hotline number and explained operating information of Chery
□ customer service to the customer.
2. "Person-to-Person" Advisory Service (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
Have assigned a specific service advisor to each customer for "Person-to-Person"
□ service.
□ Service advisor was able to address all customer questions and concerns.
If the customer is not fully satisfied with the service advisor, the customer can select
□ another service advisor.
The service advisor is the only person authorized by the dealer to answer the
□ customer's questions.
3. Feedback on Service Advisor (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
□ Appropriate manner while providing customer service.
□ Have explained with accurate documents to the customer and dispel his/her complaints.
□ Have informed customers of regularly scheduled maintenance.
□ Have informed customers of the scheduled annual inspection.
□ Have arranged service appointments timely.
□ Have asked the customer for the maintenance and service items timely.
□ Other demands from customers.
4. Business Card of Service Advisor:
Business Card of Service Advisor
Signature of Customer/Date:
Signature of Service Advisor/Date:
32
Sheet Two Kept by Dealer

Name of Customer: Date of Purchase:
Dealer of Sales & Service: Model: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN):
The following items should be confirmed by the customer:
1. Vehicle Delivery and Inspection (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
1
Have introduced the basic operation of the vehicle to the customer and performed the
□
delivery inspection.
INTRODUCTION
□ Have explained the warranty terms to the customer.
□ Have explained the precautions of driving to the customer.
□ Have explained the importance of regular maintenance and the maintenance schedule.
Have explained the importance of having regular maintenance performed at a Chery
□
authorized dealer.
□ Have delivered the Owner's Manual to the customer and reminded him/her to read it.
Have told the service hotline number and explained the procedures of Chery customer
□
service to the customer.
2. "Person-to-Person" Advisory Service (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
Have assigned a specific service advisor to each customer for "Person-to-Person"
□
service.
□ Service advisor was able to address all customer questions and concerns.
If the customer is not fully satisfied with the service advisor, the customer can select
□
another service advisor.
The service advisor is the only person authorized by the dealer to answer the
□
customer's questions.
3. Feedback on Service Advisor (mark a " √ " for "Yes" and a " × " for other conditions):
□ Appropriate manner while providing customer service.
□ Have explained with accurate documents to the customer and dispel his/her complaints.
□ Have informed customers of regularly scheduled maintenance.
□ Have informed customers of the scheduled annual inspection.
□ Have arranged service appointments timely.
□ Have asked the customer for the maintenance and service items timely.
□ Other demands from customers.
4. Business Card of Service Advisor:
Business Card of Service Advisor
Signature of Customer/Date:
Signature of Service Advisor/Date:
33
34
1-5. Vehicle Modification
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Chery

vehicles are currently available in the market. Using these spare parts
and accessories which are not OEM products may adversely affect the
safety of your vehicle. Chery cannot accept any liability or guarantee
spare parts and accessories which are not OEM products, nor for 1
replacement or installation involving such parts.
INTRODUCTION
This vehicle should not be modified with spare parts or accessories
which are not OEM products. Otherwise it could affect vehicle control
performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting
from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
WARNING
Never make changes or modifications to your vehicle. Any modifications or

alterations to your vehicle could affect its safety and may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
35
2-1. Instrument Panel
Overview ......................... 38
CVT Configure Overview .... 38
DCT Configure Overview.... 40
MT Configure Overview ...... 42
2-2. Instrument Cluster .............. 44

Speedometer ...................... 45
Tachometer......................... 45
Fuel Gauge ......................... 46
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge........ 46
Driver Information
Center ............................. 48
Time and Overspeed
Alarm Settings................. 66
2-3. Warning Lights and

Indicators......................... 68
Charging System Warning
Light ................................ 68
Daytime Running Light
Indicator .......................... 69
Front Fog Light Indicator..... 69
Rear Fog Light Indicator ..... 69
Headlight High Beam
Indicator .......................... 69
36
Section 2
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
High Coolant Temperature Transmission Malfunction

Warning Light.................. 69 Warning Light
Position Light Indicator ....... 70 (DCT/CVT Model) ........... 76
EPC Warning Light ............. 70 Parking Brake Indicator ...... 76
Engine Malfunction Tire Pressure Malfunction
Warning Light.................. 70 Indicator (if equipped) ..... 76
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light.................. 71
Turn Signal Indicator .......... 71
SRS Warning Light ............. 72
Driver Seat Belt Reminder
Light ................................ 72
Brake System Warning
Light/EBD Malfunction
Indicator .......................... 72
ABS Warning Light ............. 73
Front Passenger Seat
Belt Reminder Light
(if equipped) .................... 74
ESP Warning Light ............. 74
ESP OFF Indicator ............. 74
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light ................................ 75
Electric Power Steering
System Warning Light
(if equipped) .................... 75
Cruise Indicator .................. 75
37
Section 2. INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-1. Instrument Panel Overview
CVT Configure Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 1 12
12 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
OMT15-2000
Side defrosting outlet Volume adjustment knob

Headlight combination switch Center storage box
Driver airbag Built-in cigarette lighter
Horn switch Built-in USB 2 port
Instrument cluster Accelerator pedal
Inside temperature sensor Brake pedal
(If equipped) Hood release lever
Main menu button Card slot
Cloudrive interconnection Headlight leveling switch
Hazard light switch Outside rear view mirror
Audio system adjustment switch
Outside rear view mirror
Bluetooth telephone button
folding switch (if equipped)
Menu setting button PAS switch (if equipped)
Air conditioning side outlet Panoramic view switch (if
A/C control panel equipped)
Audio switch ESP OFF switch
38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 8 10
INSTRUMENT PANEL
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
OMT15-2010
Engine (ignition) switch Front windshield defrosting

Steering wheel adjustment outlet
lever Solar sensor (if equipped)
Frequency adjustment Front passenger airbag
shortcut button Glove box
Multi-function information USB 1 port
display switch button
Storage box tray
Mode switch button
Power outlet
Volume adjustment button
Seat Heater Switch (If
Steering wheel
equipped)
Constant speed cruise
Shift lever
control button
Off-hook button Ashtray
On-hook button Parking brake lever
Wiper and washer switch Cup holder
A/C center outlet
39
DCT Configure Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 1 12
12 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
OMT15-2002
Side defrosting outlet Volume adjustment knob

Headlight combination switch Center storage box
Driver airbag Built-in cigarette lighter
Horn switch Built-in USB 2 port
Instrument cluster Accelerator pedal
Inside temperature sensor Brake pedal
40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 8 10
INSTRUMENT PANEL
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
OMT15-2012
Engine (ignition) switch Front windshield defrosting

shortcut button Glove Box
Storage box tray
Mode switch button
Power outlet
Volume adjustment button
Seat Heater Switch (If
Steering wheel
equipped)
Constant speed cruise
Shift lever
control button
Off-hook button Ashtray
On-hook button Parking brake lever
Wiper and washer switch Cup holder
A/C center outlet
41
MT Configure Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 1 12
R 1 3 5
2 4 6
12 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
OMT15-2001
Side defrosting outlet Center storage box

Headlight combination switch Built-in cigarette lighter
Driver airbag Built-in USB 2 port
Horn switch Accelerator pedal
Instrument cluster Brake pedal
Inside temperature sensor Clutch pedal
Volume adjustment knob
42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 8 10
INSTRUMENT PANEL
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
OMT15-2011
Shift lever Front windshield defrosting

shortcut button Glove box
Storage box tray
Multimedia mode switch
Power outlet
button
Volume adjustment button Storage box
Steering wheel Engine (ignition) switch
Constant speed cruise Ashtray
control button Parking brake lever
Off-hook button Cup holder
On-hook button
Wiper and washer switch
A/C center outlet
43
2-2. Instrument Cluster
1 2 3 2 4
04:02 ECO 20°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
4WD 8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
ECO
x1000
km/h rpm
5 8 7 6 5
OMT15-2020
Speedometer Warning lights and

Turn signal indicator indicators
Light indicator Fuel gauge
Tachometer Driver information center
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
44
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the

current vehicle speed. The
04:02 vehicle speed is displayed in
0
km/h
units of km/h.
I.F.C.
8.9 L/100km 2
C H P E
INSTRUMENT PANEL
km/h
OMT15-2040
CAUTION
The speedometer will be affected by the tire size of your vehicle. Please use
Chery original tires with correct size, otherwise the speedometer will not
indicate correct vehicle speed.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the

current engine speed (indication
20°C
× 1000). The revolution is
0
km/h
displayed in units of rpm.
Trip
259 km The red zone on the dial indicates
999999 km
P E F
the permissible maximum speed
x1000
range in a short period of time

rpm
OMT15-2030
after break-in of the engine at the
operating temperature.
CAUTION
● Do not keep the needle into the red zone for a long period of time, as it may
cause severe engine damage.
● During break-in period, do not run the engine at a high speed.
45
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates current

amount of remaining fuel in the
E F
fuel tank. To get an accurate
04:02 20°C
reading on the fuel gauge, stop
0
km/h the vehicle on level ground and
I.F.C.
8.9 L/100km
Trip
259 km
999999 km
turn engine (ignition) switch to ON
P
mode.
C H E F
x1000
km/h rpm
OMT15-2050
Fuel tank capacity: 57 L
When the indicator turns red or the low fuel level warning light comes
on, it indicates that remaining fuel in the fuel tank is insufficient.
Please add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Fuel gauge reading may not be correct while accelerating, sudden braking,
cornering, or driving on a slope.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current

engine coolant temperature
C H
when engine (ignition) switch is
04:02 20°C
turned to ON mode.
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
km/h rpm
OMT15-2060
46
■ At C or approaching C (low temperature range)

When beginning to warm up, the engine may stay in this range for
a short time. The engine should not be operated at a high speed in
this temperature range. In addition, the engine load should not be
excessive.
Please contact a Chery authorized service station as soon as
possible for inspection and repair if the needle remains in this
2
range for a long time.
■ Between C and H (normal temperature range)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The needle lies in this range while driving normally. The needle
may depart off this range when the outside temperature is too high
or the engine is heavy loaded. The vehicle can be driven as long
as the high coolant temperature warning light does not turn on.
■ At H or approaching H (overheating range)
When the needle reaches red range, or the high coolant
temperature warning light comes on, it indicates that engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle immediately and turn off the engine
(ignition) switch after idling for several minutes. After the engine
cools down, identify the cause. If causes can not be found, please
contact a Chery authorized service station as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not open the coolant reservoir cap if the engine overheats. You can restart
the engine after troubleshooting.
47
Driver Information Center
Driver information center provides the driver with a variety of driving-

related data.
Zone A: Displays clock, outside

19:42 ECO 12.0°C A temperature, driving mode
(ECO, SPORT) and so on.
0
km/h B
Zone B: Displays vehicle speed,
I.F.C.
--.- L/100km 59.5 km
Trip
instantaneous fuel consumption,
5185 km
trip mileage, main menu screen,
C H P E F C
and secondary menu screen.
OMT15-2070
Zone C: Displays total mileage,

gear position, engine coolant
temperature gauge and fuel
gauge.
■ Switching displayed items
Multi-function information display
1 2 3
adjustment button is located on
steering wheel.
1. Turn-left button
2. Enter button
3. Turn-right button
OMT15-2100
48
■ First menu
The following displayed items will be switched by steering wheel
combination button (turn-left button " " /turn-right button " ", blue
arrows indicate long press " " button, pink arrows indicate short
press " " button).
2
19:42 ECO 12.0°C 19:42 ECO 12.0°C 18:45 ECO 12.0°C 18:46 ECO 12.0°C
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0
km/h
0
km/h
Exit Time Alarm Fatigue
Fatigue Driving
18:45 Off 4.0h 4.0 h

I.F.C. Trip I.F.C. Trip
8.7 L/100km 0 km 8.7 L/100km 59.5 km Press To Switch
5185 km 5185 km Press To Save
C H P E F C H P E F
0
km/h
0
km/h Vehicle State
2 Warning Messages
A.F.E. D.T.E. A.F.E. D.T.E. Please Check ABS
--.- L/100km 72 km 13.0 L/100km 72 km Press To Set
1/2
5185 km 5185 km 5185 km 5186 km
C H P E F C H P E F C H P E F C H P E F
19:41 ECO 12.0°C 19:25 ECO 11.0°C
bar °C bar °C
FM 93.3 MHZ
bar °C bar °C
5185 km 5185 km
C H P E F C H P E F
OMT15-2101
49
■ Secondary menu
Switch to setting menu through turn-left button " " /turn-right button
" " of the steering wheel combination button. Pink arrows indicate
short press " " button to enter setting screen.
18:44 ECO 12.0°C 18:44 ECO 12.0°C 18:44 ECO 12.0°C
Time
Exit Time Alarm Fatigue Exit Time Alarm Fatigue

18 h 18:44 Off 4.0h 18:44 Off 4.0h
44 m
Press To Switch
Press To Save
18:44 ECO 12.0°C 18:44 ECO 12.0°C 00:04 ECO 10.0°C 18:47 ECO 53.0°F
Speed Alarm Language
Exit Time Alarm Fatigue Alarm Fatigue Unit Lang
Off 18:45 Off 4.0h 120 km/h 1.0h °C English English

Press To Switch Press To Switch
Press To Save Press To Save
Fatigue Driving Temperature Unit
Exit Time Alarm Fatigue Time Alarm Fatigue Unit
4.0 h 18:45 Off 4.0h 18:46 120 km/h 4.0h °C °C

OMT15-2102
CAUTION
Use the information screen as a reference. Please refer to actual vehicle.
50
■ Display items
● Gear position display (CVT/DCT model)
Displays the current shift lever
position.
P
04:02 20°C
0
km/h
2
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
INSTRUMENT PANEL
OMT15-2080
● Gear shift hint (MT model, if equipped)

Displays the gear shift hint signal.
1
04:02 20°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H 1 E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2071
● Driving mode (if equipped)

Displays the current driving mode
(SPORT mode/ECO mode).
ECO
04:02 ECO 20°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2073
51
● Warning icon
When the vehicle condition is
abnormal, the indicator comes on.
04:02 20°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2072
● Overspeed alarm (if equipped)

When vehicle speed reaches the
120 set value, the indicator comes on.
04:02 ECO 20°C

120
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2074
● Outside temperature (if equipped)

Displays the current outside
temperature.
20.6°C
04:02 20.6°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2081
52
● Multi-information display
Displays the current audio mode
and other related information.
19:41 ECO 12.0°C
For example: In radio mode, it

FM93.75 MHz
displays "FM 93.75 MHz"; in USB
mode, it only displays USB.
5185 km
2
C H P E F
OMT15-2075
INSTRUMENT PANEL
● Tire pressure display (if equipped)
Displays the current front wheel
tire pressure and temperature
19:25 ECO 11.0°C
! !
information.
bar °C bar °C
When tire condition is abnormal or

a system problem is received,
! !
bar °C bar °C
5185 km multi-function information display

C H P E F
screen will switch to tire pressure
OMT15-2076
screen from normal display.
● Vehicle condition search
When the engine (ignition) switch
is turned on, the system performs
19:41 ECO 12.0°C
self-check. When it detects any

Vehicle State
2 Warning Messages vehicle abnormal information, the
B zone will display the abnormal
Press To Set
5185 km
information one by one. The
C H P E F operation can not be exited
OMT15-2077 automatically, and the screen will
be exited after displaying all
informations.
53
1. Switch to vehicle condition

19:41 ECO 12.0°C search screen through turn-
Vehicle State
left button " " /turn-right
button " " on the steering
2 Warning Messages
Press To Set
C H P E
5185 km
F
wheel combination button,
short press " " to enter
abnormal information display
screen.
16:46 ECO 7.0°C
2. If there are multiple abnormal

Please Check ABS
1/2
5186 km
information in the system, they
P
will be displayed in B zone,
C H E F
OMT15-2078
operate turn-left button " " /
turn-right button " " button to
switch to different abnormal
information screen.
For example: "Please Check
ABS".
CAUTION
If the vehicle displays any warning prompt, please turn off engine and contact
a Chery authorized service station.
54
● Maintenance Reminder
1. When the engine (ignition)
switch is turned on, the
00:05 ECO 10.0°C
system performs self-check.

When it detects vehicle
Maintenance reaches the maintenance
2/6
5186 km
mileage, a maintenance
2
C H P E F reminder will be displayed in B
OMT15-2096 zone.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Perform maintenance
information search by vehicle
condition search.
When maintenance is not cleared, you can compare maintenance
mileage to the first maintenance mileage, when it reaches the first
maintenance mileage, the multi-function information display hints
"Please maintain the vehicle"; When maintenance is cleared, you can
compare maintenance mileage to maintenance intervals, when it
reaches maintenance interval, the multi-function information display
prompts "Please maintain the vehicle".
Method of resetting maintenance indicator:
It can be cleared manually Press and hold the Enter button on the
steering wheel with engine (ignition) switch OFF/ACC mode, then
switch to ON mode and press the button and hold for 5s, the
maintenance prompt will be cleared.
It can be reset by professionals with a diagnostic tester. Please go to
a Chery authorized service station for resetting.
CAUTION
● The maintenance indicator must be reset after maintaining vehicle each

time.
● Maintenance mileage will not be lost due to power failure, it can be cleared
by a diagnostic tester.
55
● Clock
Time is displayed in 24-hour format, and it can be set by an
adjustment button and the touch display screen.
For how to set the time using the touch display screen, please refer to
"Time Settings" in this section.
Time setting method using steering wheel adjustment button is listed
below:
1. Switch to setting menu
through turn-left button " " /
18:43 ECO 12.0°C
turn-right button " " on the
Exit Time
18:43
Alarm
Off
Fatigue
4.0h steering wheel combination

button, short press " " to
enter setting.
18:44 ECO 12.0°C 18:44 ECO 12.0°C
2. Short press turn-left button
Time Time " " /turn-right button " " on
18 h
44 m
18 h
44 m the steering wheel
combination button to add/
subtract 1 on original data.

3. Long press turn-left button
OMT15-2090
" " /turn-right button " " on

the steering wheel
subtract original data
continuously.
4. Short press " " after setting
or 5 S later without operation
to exit settings.
56
● Overspeed alarm (if equipped)

Overspeed alarm can be set by an adjustment button and the touch
display screen.
For how to set the overspeed alarm using the touch display, please
refer to "Overspeed Alarm Settings" in this section.
Overspeed alarm setting method using steering wheel adjustment
button is listed below:
2
1. Select overspeed alarm
option, and short press " " to
INSTRUMENT PANEL
18:44 ECO 12.0°C

enter settings.
18:45 120 km/h 4.0h

the steering wheel
18:45 ECO 12.0°C
Speed Alarm subtract 5 on original data.
120 km/h 3. Short press " " after setting
to exit settings.
Press To Switch
Press To Save
OMT15-2091
1. Adjustable overspeed alarm

19:42 SPORT 12.0°C
110 When vehicle speed reaches
125 the set value, the indicated
km/h
speed value on driving
I.F.C. Trip information display screen
8.9 L/100km 59.5 km
5185 km turns red (the screen does not
C H P E F
switch) + the alarm buzzer
OMT15-2079 turns on (sound 3 times) +
110 (the specific set vehicle
speed value is shown in the
icon), when the indicated
speed is lower than (set value
-5 km/h), the alarm icon goes
57
out. If it reaches the set value,

it will trigger the alarm again.
2. Unadjustable overspeed alarm
When vehicle speed reaches the set value, the indicated speed
value on driving information display screen turns red (the screen
does not switch) + the alarm buzzer turns on (sound 3 times) +
120 ; Only when the indicated speed is less than 115 km/h, and
then comes over 120 km/h, it will trigger the alarm again.
CAUTION
● The speed limit is changed by 5 km/h.

● The speed limit can be set circularly between 30 km/h to 130 km/h and
close.
● Fatigue driving
Fatigue driving time can be set by steering wheel button. Its default
setting is 1 hour, when driving time exceeds the set time, "Driving
time exceeds - h, take a rest" will be displayed on the multi-function
information display screen, sound alarm (1 s) and fatigue driving icon
" " will be displayed also to prompt the driver to have a rest.
Fatigue driving setting method using steering wheel adjustment
58
1. Select fatigue driving option,

18:45 ECO 12.0°C
and short press " " to enter
settings.
18:45 Off 4.0h

the steering wheel
18:46 ECO 12.0°C
2
Fatigue Driving subtract 0.5 on original data.
4.0 h 3. Short press " " after setting
INSTRUMENT PANEL
to exit settings.
Press To Switch
Press To Save
OMT15-2092
CAUTION
● The fatigue driving is changed by 0.5 h.

● The fatigue value can be set circularly between 1 h to 4 h and turnoff.
● Temperature unit
Temperature unit setting method using steering wheel adjustment
1. Select temperature unit
18:46 ECO 12.0°C
option, and short press " " to
Time Alarm Fatigue Unit
enter settings.
18:46 120 km/h 4.0h °C

the steering wheel
18:46 ECO 12.0°C
combination button to switch
Temperature Unit temperature unit between
°C degree centigrade and
Press
Press
To Switch
To Save fahrenheit.
to exit settings.
OMT15-2093
59
● Language
Language setting method using steering wheel adjustment button is
listed below:
1. Select language option, and
00:04 ECO 10.0°C
short press " " to enter
Alarm Fatigue Unit Lang
settings.
120 km/h 1.0h °C English

the steering wheel
18:47 ECO 53.0°F
combination button to switch
Language language between switch
English language among English,
Press
Press
To Switch
To Save Russian and Arabic.
to exit settings.
OMT15-2094
CAUTION
The steering wheel adjustment button can only be used to set the language of
multi-function display.
● Driving range
Displays estimated maximum
D.T.E. distance that can be driven with
72 km remaining fuel.
04:02 20°C
0
km/h
This distance is computed based
A.F.E.
13.0 L/100km
D.T.E.
72 km
5185 km
on average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual driving range
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
may differ from that displayed.

OMT15-2083
60
When the fuel gauge

19:42 ECO 12.0°C
approaches or reaches E (red
0 alarm position) or low fuel level
km/h
indicator comes on, it indicates
I.F.C. Trip the remaining fuel in fuel tank is
--.- L/100km 59.5 km
5185 km
insufficient. Please refuel
C H P E F immediately.
OMT15-2061
2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
● When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not
be updated.
● When refueling, turn the engine (ignition) switch off. Otherwise, the display
may not be updated.
● Instantaneous fuel consumption

Display instantaneous fuel
I.F.C. consumption (IFC).
8.9 L/100km
04:02 20°C
1. Instantaneous fuel consumption
0
km/h
shows instantaneous fuel
I.F.C.
8.9 L/100km
Trip
259 km
999999 km
consumption calculated value 0-
20 L/100 km. Its maximum
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
display is 20 L/100 km.

OMT15-2085
If the value is over 20 L/100 km,
it still shows 20 L/100 km.
2. When vehicle starts and the
actual vehicle speed is less
than 3 km/h, it will show --.- L/
100 km.
When actual vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 3 km/
h, it will show as format 0 - 20
L/100 km. If the speed is
61
below 1 km/h, it will display --.-

L/100 km.
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption
is without memory function.
● Trip mileage
Trip mileage display range: 0-
Trip 999.9 Km. When exceeding 999.9
259 km km, it will return to zero and began
04:02 20°C
to accumulate again.
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2086
Return-to-zero method: long

19:42 ECO 12.0°C press the " " button on the
0 km/h
steering wheel button in the
I.F.C. Trip
driving mode.
8.7 L/100km 59.5 km
5185 km
C H P E F
19:42 ECO 12.0°C
0
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.7 L/100km 0 km
5185 km
C H P E F
OMT15-2117
62
● Total mileage
The total mileage displaying
range is 0 - 999999 km.
5828 km
04:02 20°C
It will always display "999999"
0
km/h
km if it exceeds the range.
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
5828 km
C H P E F
2
x1000
rpm
OMT15-2087
INSTRUMENT PANEL
● Average fuel consumption
Displays average fuel
A.F.E. consumption (AFE).
13.0 L/100km
04:02 20°C
The value is displayed on the
0
km/h
LDC and refreshed per 10 s. Its
A.F.E.
13.0 L/100km
D.T.E.
72 km
5185 km
max value displayed is 20 L/100
km. It will always display 20 L/
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
100 km if it exceeds the max

OMT15-2084
value.
Return-to-zero method: Long

19:41 ECO 12.0°C press the " " button in the
0 average fuel consumption mode.
km/h
A.F.E. D.T.E.
13.0 L/100km 72 km
5185 km
C H P E F
19:41 ECO 12.0°C
0
km/h
A.F.E. D.T.E.
--.- L/100km 72 km
5185 km
C H P E F
OMT15-2118
63
● Alarm text information

When the alarm conditions are
met, the driver information center
04:02 20.5°C
will display the corresponding

alarm text and picture
1.F.C.
Please Check
The Engine Coolant
Trip information.
8.8 L/100km 9 km
999999 km For example: When the coolant
C H D E F
level is too low or the
OMT15-2062
temperature is too high, the
driver information display center
will display "Please Check The
Engine Coolant".
Items displayed on alarm text information screen also consist:
"Please Check PEPS", "Please Check TPMS", "Please Check
Airbag", "Please Check ESP" , "Please Check EPS" , "Please
Check Gearbox" , "Please Check AVM" and so on. In daily driving,
you can check if the vehicle has the above problem information on
"Vehicle condition search". Please refer to "Vehicle condition
search" in this section.
CAUTION
● If error indicator comes on, please turn off engine and contact a Chery
authorized service station.
● Horn will sound in some alarm cases only.
64
● Reversing radar information

When the engine (ignition)
switch is switched to ON mode
00:01 ECO 12.0°C
and shift lever is shifted to R

position, the driver information
center will display reversing
radar information.
2
For details, please refer to
OMT15-2088
"Reversing Radar System" in
INSTRUMENT PANEL
section 4.
● Doors status indication
When any side doors or hood is
11:11 ECO 20.0°C
open, driver information center
will indicate which door is open.
C H P E F
OMT15-2082
When speed is less than 5 km/h with a door or hood open, the buzzer
will not sound but the corresponding door or the hood symbol will turn
on; When speed is greater than or equal to 5 km/h, the buzzer will
sound and the corresponding door or the hood symbol will flash
continuously to inform driver to close that door or the hood.
CAUTION
Do not drive vehicle with any door open or not fully closed, to prevent
passengers from being thrown out if a door suddenly opens, resulting in death
or serious injury.
65
Time and Overspeed Alarm Settings
■ Time settings
1. Turn on audio system and
select "SET".
OMT15-2114
N
2. Select "Vehicle Setting".

Blind spot monitoring Quit 3. Click "Instrument Time" to
DRL Display Setting
enter time settings screen.
Rear Camera Sound Setting
Security Tips Lights and Horn. > Vehicle Setting
Speed Alarm Close > System Setting
Instrument Time 04:27 > Quick Guide
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-2113
4. Slide the value list up or down

< Set Instrument Time
Security Tips
of "Hour" and "Minute" on the
17
18
6
7
Speed Alarm screen to set time.
19 Hour 8 Minute Instrument Time 5. Click "OK" after setting to exit.
20 9
Instrument Backlight
21 10
Restore Default Setting
OK
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-2110
66
■ Overspeed alarm settings
1. Turn on audio system and

select "SET".
2
P
INSTRUMENT PANEL
R
OMT15-2114
N
2. Select "Vehicle Setting".

Blind spot monitoring Quit 3. Click "Speed Alarm" to enter
DRL Display Setting
overspeed alarm settings
Rear Camera Sound Setting
screen.
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-2119
4. Touch value on the screen to

< Set Speed Alarm
Blind spot monitoring
set speed alarm.
110
DRL 5. Exit the screen after setting.
115
Rear Camera
120 km/h
125 Security Tips

130
Speed Alarm
Instrument Time
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-2115
67
2-3. Warning Lights and Indicators
Indicators are used to inform driver of the operating condition of

vehicle. Warning lights are used to warn driver that the vehicle has a
problem which could cause serious damage. For example, when a
certain system on the vehicle is malfunctioning, the relevant warning
light will come on or flash.
After engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, some warning
lights will come on shortly for system's self-check. If a certain
warning light does not come on, please contact a Chery authorized
service station for inspection and repair. If a certain warning light
remains on or flashes after starting the engine, please immediately
contact a Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair.
Charging System Warning Light
+ - This indicator is used to indicate that the battery status.

When the engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode,
the warning light will come on for self-check, and it will go
off after the engine is started. If it does not go off after
engine is started or comes on while driving, it indicates
charging system is malfunctioning. Please stop the vehicle
at a safe area, turn on the hazard lights, turn off the engine
and contact a Chery authorized service station as soon as
possible for inspection and repair.
CAUTION
When charging system warning light comes on, do not run the engine or turn
on electrical appliances until cause is found, to prevent the battery from
depleting.
68
Daytime Running Light Indicator
Daytime running light and its indicator come on when

engine starts. When turn headlight high beam lights/low
beam lights, fog lights, position lights on, it will turns off.
Front Fog Light Indicator 2
When front fog lights is turned on, the indicator will come
INSTRUMENT PANEL
on.
Rear Fog Light Indicator
When rear fog lights is turned on, the indicator will come
on.
Headlight High Beam Indicator
When headlight high beam is turned on or flashes, the

indicator will come on.
High Coolant Temperature Warning Light
The warning light will go off after illuminating for 3 seconds

when engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode. If this
light comes on during driving, and alarm text information
appears at the same time on driver information center, stop
the vehicle at a safe area immediately, turn on the hazard
lights and turn off the engine after idling for several
minutes. Check if the coolant level is too low. Add coolant if
necessary. Meanwhile, contact a Chery authorized service
station for inspection and repair. Please refer to "If Your
Vehicle Overheats" in section 6.
69
WARNING
● Beware of burns! When the engine is hot, the cooling system is under high
temperature and high pressure condition. Therefore, always perform
inspection until engine cools down.
● Never touch the cooling fan!
Position Light Indicator
This indicator comes on when position lights come on.
EPC Warning Light
When engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, the

EPC warning light will come on and engine will be in self-
checking mode. If this light goes off after engine is started,
it indicates that system is normal. If this light does not go
off or comes on while driving, it means that engine is
malfunctioning. Please contact a Chery authorized service
station as soon as possible for inspection and repair.
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
When engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, the

warning light will come on and engine will be in self-
checking mode. If this light goes off after engine is started,
it indicates that system is normal. If this light does not go
off or comes on while driving, it means that engine is
70
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will go off after illuminating for 3 seconds

when engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode. If this
light does not go off or it flashes while driving with a buzzer
sounding, please stop the vehicle at a safe area, turn off
the engine, turn on the hazard lights and check the engine
2
oil level. If oil level is too low, add engine oil immediately. If
causes cannot be found, please contact a Chery
INSTRUMENT PANEL
authorized service station as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the oil consumption is too fast, please go to a Chery authorized service

Turn Signal Indicator
Turn signal indicators contain left turn signal indicator and

right turn signal indicator. When left or right turn signal
lights are turned on, the corresponding turn signal
indicators will flash (slowly). When hazard light switch is
turned on, both of them will flash simultaneously.
CAUTION
If the indicator flashes faster than usual, it means that corresponding turn
signal light is malfunctioning. Please contact a Chery authorized service
71
SRS Warning Light
The SRS warning light will go off after flashing 6 times

when engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, it
indicates system is normal. If SRS warning light does not
go off or it comes on while driving, it indicates that SRS
system has a problem. Please contact a Chery authorized
service station immediately for inspection and repair.
WARNING
If the vehicle is involved in collisions, even if the airbags do not activate, you
should contact the Chery authorized service station immediately for inspection
and repair.
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, if

the driver seat belt is not buckled or fastened properly, the
reminder light will blink continuously. When vehicle speed
is greater than or equal to 25 km/h, a buzzer will sound and
the warning symbol will flash synchronously to inform
driver to fasten the belt properly. For details, please refer to
"Seat Belt Reminder Light" in section 3.
Brake System Warning Light/EBD Malfunction Indicator

light will go off after illuminating for 3 seconds. If it does not
go off or comes on during driving, it indicates that brake
system is malfunctioning. Please check brake fluid level
firstly. Add brake fluid as necessary. If cause cannot be
found, please contact a Chery authorized service station
as soon as possible to have brake system checked.
72
WARNING
● If the brake system warning light comes on while driving, it indicates that
brake system is malfunctioning. If this happens, please stop the vehicle at a
safe area, turn on the hazard lights and contact a Chery authorized service
● If the dual brake circuits are malfunctioning, braking performance will
seriously deteriorate even may be lost. do not drive the vehicle at this time, 2
otherwise this may cause a serious accident.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ABS Warning Light

the ABS system will perform self-check, and the warning
light will go off after illuminating for 3 seconds, indicating
system is normal. If it does not go off or comes on during
driving, it indicates that ABS system is malfunctioning. The
vehicle can still carry out conventional braking with ABS
failed, therefore, you should drive carefully and avoid
sudden braking. Please contact a Chery authorized service
WARNING
If the ABS warning light and brake system warning light remain on
simultaneously, please immediately stop the vehicle at a safe area, turn on the
hazard lights and contact a Chery authorized service station as soon as
possible for inspection and repair.
73
Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light (if equipped)
When the engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode

and the front passenger seat has an occupant, if the front
passenger seat belt is not buckled or fastened properly, the
reminder light will blink continuously. When vehicle speed
is greater than or equal to 25 km/h, a buzzer will sound and
the warning symbol will flash synchronously to inform front
passenger to fasten the belt properly. For details, please
refer to "Seat Belt Reminder Light" in section 3.
ESP Warning Light
ESP warning light flashes indicate ESP system is working

properly. If the light remains on and "Please Check ESP"
appears on the LED, it indicates this system is
station as soon as possible for inspection and repair for
safety.
ESP OFF Indicator
Press ESP OFF switch to turn off ESP function, the

OFF indicator will come on. Press the switch again to enable
ESP function again, and the indicator will go off.
CAUTION
To improve vehicle traction on sand or gravel road, it is better to turn off the
ESP function.
74
Low Fuel Level Warning Light

the warning light will go off after illuminating for 3 seconds.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is insufficient, the warning
light will come on. Add fuel as soon as possible at this
time.
2
CAUTION
INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the vehicle is driving on a slope road, the warning light might come on in
advance because of fuel swaying.
Electric Power Steering System Warning Light (if equipped)

If this light does not go off or comes on while driving, and
"Please Check EPS" appears on the LED, it indicates this
system is malfunctioning. The vehicle can still carry out
conventional steering with electric power steering system
failed, therefore, you should drive carefully and go to the
Chery authorized service station to have it checked and
repaired.
Cruise Indicator
When cruise control function is turned on, vehicle will enter

stand-by cruise mode and the indicator will flash
continuously. After vehicle enters cruise mode, the
indicator keeps on. When cruise control function is turned
off, the cruise control will be canceled and the indicator will
go off.
75
Transmission Malfunction Warning Light (DCT/CVT Model)

If this light does not go off or comes on while driving, it
indicates this system is malfunctioning. Please contact a
Chery authorized service station to repair the transmission.
Parking Brake Indicator

parking brake indicator will work. The parking brake
indicator will come on when pulling the parking brake lever.
It will go off after the parking brake lever is fully released.
When speed is greater than or equal to 5 km/h, the buzzer
will sound, the indicator will flash, and the driver
information center will display alarm text information to
alert driver that the parking brake lever is not fully released
yet.
Tire Pressure Malfunction Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator is used to indicate that the tire pressure is

too low or the system is malfunctioning. It will go off after
illuminating for 3 seconds when engine (ignition) switch is
in ON mode. If this light does not go off or comes on while
driving, it indicates tire pressure system is malfunctioning.
Check if the tire pressure is too low. If the press it normal,
please contact a Chery authorized service station for
inspection and repair as soon as possible.
76
INSTRUMENT PANEL
77
3-1. Key ..................................... 80 3-5. Anti-theft System ................ 97
Engine (Ignition) Switch...... 80 Engine Immobilizer
Smart Key ........................... 81 System ............................ 97
Replace Smart Key Vehicle Anti-theft System.... 97
Battery ............................ 83
3-6. Horn .................................. 100
3-2. Keyless Entry &
Start System ....................86 3-7. Steering Wheel ................. 101
Antenna Location and Adjusting Steering
Effective Range .............. 87 Wheel............................ 101
3-3. Locking and Unlocking 3-8. Windows ........................... 102

Doors ...............................90 Power Windows ................ 102
Locking and Unlocking Window Lock Switch......... 107
Doors with Wireless
Remote Control 3-9. Hood ................................. 108
Function .......................... 90
Locking and Unlocking
3-10. Fuel Tank Cap .................. 110
Doors with the
Mechanical Key .............. 91
Opening Back Door ............ 91 3-11. Seat belts.......................... 113
Seat Belt Reminder
Light .............................. 113
3-4. Door Locks ......................... 94
Correct Use of Seat Belt ... 114
Door Locks ......................... 94
Maintenance of
Rear Door Child-protection
Seat Belt ....................... 115
Locks .............................. 96
78
Section 3
OPERATION
INSTRUCTIONS
Fastening and Releasing Modification and Disposal

Seat Belt ....................... 116 of Airbag System
Type of Three-point Components.................. 130
Seat Belts ..................... 116
Seat Belt Shoulder Anchor 3-13. Child Restraint System ..... 131
Height Adjuster Types of Child Restraint
(Front Seats) ................. 117 System .......................... 131
Rear Center Seat Belt ...... 118
Stow Rear Seat Belt 3-14. Installing Child Restraints
Buckles ......................... 119 System ..........................134
Front Seat Belt Installation with
Pretensioners Three-point Type
(if equipped) .................. 119 Seat Belt ....................... 134
Seat Belt Usage and Precautions for Installing
Precautions for Child Restraint System
Children ........................ 121 on Front Passenger
Seat Belt Usage and Seat............................... 142
Precautions for Installation of Child
Pregnant Women .......... 121 Restraint with Anchors
(ISO-FIX Child Restraint
System)......................... 143
3-12. Airbag System SRS.......... 123
Child Restraint Systems
SRS Warning Light ........... 123
with a Top Strap............ 144
Airbag System SRS.......... 124
Driver Airbag and Front
Passenger Airbag ......... 125
Airbag Precautions ........... 127
79
Section 3. OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
3-1. Key
Engine (Ignition) Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with following keys.

Vehicle with keyless entry & start system:
Smart key
1
Smart key number plate
OMT15-3010
■ Smart key
Using wireless remote control function to lock and unlock all doors
and enable back door external electronic lock; using and disabling
vehicle anti-theft system. The mechanical key built into the smart
key can also lock and unlock all the doors.
For more detailed information about smart key, please refer to
"Keyless Entry & Start System" in this section.
CAUTION
● Do not bend the key.

● If engine cannot be started by using the key, please contact the Chery
authorized service station for inspection and repair.
80
Smart Key
Smart key
Indicator light
1
Lock button
2 3
Unlock button
4 Back door electronic switch
5 6
enabling button
OMT15-3030 Mechanical key 3
Mechanical key release
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
button
Push mechanical key release button on smart key to use mechanical
key. Return mechanical key to its home position after using it for easy
carry.
Mechanical key can be used to lock/unlock all doors.
Keep your spare key in a safe place for emergency use.
Wireless remote control function is designed to lock and unlock all
doors from a distance of approximately 10 m (no blind area). The
smart key may not operate properly if distance between vehicle and
smart key is more than 10 m.
CAUTION
Effective distance to lock and unlock doors with smart key will be shorten if
signal is deflected by obstructions.
When pressing any button on smart key, indicator will illuminate. If

the indicator does not turn on, the battery may be depleted. Replace
the battery as soon as possible.
Smart key is electronic component. Observe the following
instructions to avoid damaging smart key:
● Do not leave smart key in a high temperature place.
● Do not disassemble smart key.
81
● Do not hit smart key with other objects or drop it.

● Do not put smart key in water.
If the doors cannot be operated with the smart key within a normal
distance, check the following conditions:
● Check if smart key battery is too low. If the battery is too low,
replace it with a new one. Please refer to "Replace Smart Key
Battery" in this section.
● Check if there is radio station or airport radio wave transmitter
nearby which can interfere with the normal operation of smart key.
The transmitting frequency of smart key may be interfered by other
low-frequency wireless transmitters (such as non-professional radio
stations, remote control, alarm systems). If the vehicle cannot be
locked or unlocked due to interference with the wireless remote
control transmitting frequency, you can lock/unlock the doors with the
mechanical key.
CAUTION
● Without authorization, do not change the transmitting frequency, increase

the transmitting power (including installation of RF power amplifier), install
external or other transmitting antennas.
● Be careful not to make harmful interference to various legal radio
communication when using this product. Once interference occurs, please
stop using it immediately and take measures to eliminate the interference.
Then continue to use it.
● This product is a low-frequency radio equipment, which can suffer the
various radio interferences or the radiation interferences from industrial,
scientific and medical devices.
If you lose your smart key, contact the Chery authorized service
station as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft or accident.
82
Replace Smart Key Battery
Smart key battery may be low or discharged when any of the

following symptoms occurs:
● Smart key cannot operate the doors within normal distance when
there is no interference.
● The indicator is dim or does not come on when any button on
smart key is pressed.
Type: 3V-CR2032 lithium battery.
3
CAUTION
● Do not discard waste battery at ease and place changed waste battery into
battery recycling position in accordance with local regulation.
● Only replace with the battery recommended by Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
● Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the
removed battery or components.
■ Replace smart key battery

Replace smart key battery by the following procedures.
1. Push mechanical key release

button to take out mechanical
1
key.
2
OMT15-3040
83
2. Pry off smart key cover (1)

using a flathead screwdriver
with the tip taped, and then
2 remove circuit board (2).
1
OMT15-3130
1 2 3. Take out battery holder from

circuit board.
OMT15-3140
1 2 4. Remove the depleted battery

from battery holder and
replace it with a new one with
the positive (+) side up.
OMT15-3150
5. Install smart key in position in removed reverse order.

6. When pressing either button on smart key, make sure the indicator
comes on. After replacing battery, check that smart key operates
properly.
If smart key still does not operate properly, contact a Chery
84
CAUTION
● Do not bend the terminals.

● Make sure the positive side and the negative side of the battery are placed
correctly.
● Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause the battery to
rust.
● Do not touch new battery with oil on your fingers, which may cause battery
deterioration.
● Do not touch or move any components inside smart key, as this may
3
interfere with its proper operation.
● Be careful not to bend the electrode when installing battery.
● Make sure to install the key properly.
85
3-2. Keyless Entry & Start System
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying smart

key (for example in your pocket) on your person. (The driver should
always carry smart key.)
■ Locking and unlocking Doors

Press switch on door handle to
lock and unlock all doors when
carrying smart key on your
person, enable back door
external electronic switch and
will use and disable vehicle anti-
theft system.
OMT15-3080
CAUTION
● If smart key is left inside the vehicle, the system will disable door handle
switch for safety, vehicle can be unlocked and locked by using remote
control.
● Operating interval of door handle switch is 0.5 s, and the door handle switch
will not be operated if using it continuously within 0.5 s.
■ Open the back door

When the door is in unlock
condition, back door external
electronic switch is enabled,
back door can be opened with
pressing switch without needing
to carry smart key;
When the door is in lock
OMT15-3090 condition, back door external
electronic switch is disabled,
back door can be opened with
pressing electronic switch with
carrying smart key.
86
■ Starting the engine

Starting the engine and changing
engine (ignition) switch modes
when smart key is left inside the
vehicle.
Please refer to "Engine (ignition)
switch" in forth section.
OMT15-3100
3
Antenna Location and Effective Range
■ Antenna location
Luggage compartment external
1 2 3 4 5 low-frequency antenna
Low-frequency antenna inside
the rear of vehicle
the middle of vehicle
Front door handles low-
frequency antenna
1 2 3 4 5
the front of vehicle
OMT15-3530
87
■ Effective range (areas within which smart key is detected)

When enabling or changing
power modes
The system can be operated
when smart key is inside the
vehicle.
When locking or unlocking
OMT15-3540
the doors
when smart key is within
effective range of the outside
front door handles low-frequency
antenna.
Unlocking back door
when smart key is within
effective range of luggage
compartment external low-
frequency antenna.
CAUTION
● The corresponding door can be operated when smart key is within about
1.5 m of the front door handles low-frequency antenna.
● The back door can be operated when smart key is within about 1.5 m of
luggage compartment external low-frequency antenna.
88
■ Conditions affecting operation

The keyless entry & start system uses low-frequency radio waves.
In the following situations, the communication between smart key
and the vehicle may be affected, preventing keyless entry & start
system, wireless remote control and anti-theft system from
operating properly.
● When smart key battery is low or depleted.
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise. 3
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone
or other wireless communication device.
● Make sure smart key is not covered by metallic objects, failure to
do so electromagnetic waves may be shielded and smart key
may not be recognized accurately, causing system is not
operated properly.
● More than one smart keys are being used nearby.
■ Notes for keyless entry
● Even when smart key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following
cases:
• Smart key is too close to the window or roof when the doors
are locked.
• Smart key is on the instrument panel, back door, floor, or in
glove box when the engine is started or engine (ignition)
switch modes are changed.
● As long as smart key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone with smart key.
■ Alarm hint
When vehicle is in alarm modes, BCM will enter alarm condition in
the following cases:
● The door is opened
● back door is opened improperly
89
3-3. Locking and Unlocking Doors
Locking and Unlocking Doors with Wireless Remote Control Function
■ Lock operation
Press lock button on smart key
to lock all doors, turn signal lights
will flash once and anti-theft
system will sound once
simultaneously. Vehicle anti-theft
system is enabled.
* Refer to "Vehicle Setting" in the
OMT15-3050
fifth section to change alarm hint
on touch-screen.
If any door is open or not fully closed, press the lock button on
smart key, all doors will lock and then unlock immediately. Turn
signal lights will flash twice and anti-theft system will not sound, to
inform driver that anti-theft system is not set.
■ Unlock operation
Press unlock button on smart
key to unlock all doors and turn
signal lights will flash twice.
Vehicle anti-theft system is
unlocked.
You have 30 seconds to open a
door after doors are unlocked
OMT15-3060
with smart key. If no door is
opened by then, all doors will be
automatically locked again and
vehicle anti-theft system is set
again.
90
CAUTION
With engine (ignition) switch in ON or ACC mode, locking operation cannot be

performed by using smart key.
Locking and Unlocking Doors with the Mechanical Key
There is only one external door

keyhole which is located on the
driver's door. 3
LOCK
UNLOCK
Insert mechanical key into the
keyhole and turn it.
Unlock: Turn mechanical key
counterclockwise.
OMT15-3170
Lock: Turn mechanical key
clockwise.
CAUTION
● Anti-theft function will be triggered if front left doors are unlocked with
mechanical key and open after doors are be locked by using smart key.
● Anti-theft function cannot be enabled if doors are locked with mechanical
key. We recommend that you should lock doors with smart key.
Opening Back Door
According to the following two methods to open back door.

■ Using keyless entry & start system
Please refer to "Keyless Entry & Start System" in this section.
91
■ Using back door electronic switch enabling button on smart

key
The door is in lock condition:
1. Long press back door
electronic switch enabling
button on smart key for 1.5 s,
turn signal lights will flash
once and then enable back
door external electronic lock.
OMT15-3560
2. Press back door opening button
to open back door. (If there is no
operation after enabling back
door electronic lock within 30 s,
electronic lock will be locked
again.)
When the door is in unlock condition, back door external electronic
switch is enabled, and press the switch to open back door without
needing to carry smart key.
CAUTION
Back door will not be opened when the vehicle reaches a speed of 10 km/h.
WARNING
● Keep back door closing during driving. If back door is opened, it may hit
nearby objects or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out while driving,
causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle,
causing a serious health hazard.
● Do not allow a child to open or close back door. Doing so may cause the
back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or
neck to be caught.
92
■ Emergency release switch

Back door can be opened from
1
inside vehicle by using back door
release switch when back door
can not be opened by the
2
several ways above.
OMT15-6310
93
3-4. Door Locks
Door Locks
■ Doors and back door are locked and unlocked by using door
lock switch
Unlock switch
1 Lock switch
2
SRS
AIRBAG
All doors and back door
electronic switch are locked and
unlocked by pressing lock/unlock
switch.
OMT15-3190
If either door is opened, doors
and back door can not be locked.
■ Opening doors with door inside handles
When doors are in unlock

condition, pull door inside handle
to open door.
SRS
AIRBAG
OMT15-3231
■ Door inside lock knob
All doors are locked and

unlocked simultaneously by
using the driver's door inside
lock knob.
SRS
AIRBAG
OMT15-3233
94
There are individual inside lock

knobs on front passenger's door
and rear passengers' doors that
operate each respective door.
If you want to lock front
passenger's door and rear
passenger's door from outside,
set inside lock knob in lock
position and then close the door.
3
OMT15-3234
CAUTION
Do not use door inside knob to lock driver's door from outside.
■ Vehicle lock automatically

All doors will lock automatically when vehicle speed exceeds 20
km/h. After engine (ignition) switch is turned off, door will unlock
automatically.
CAUTION
After stopping vehicle and unlocking door manually, lock function will be closed
automatically when driving vehicle again without opening either door. Turn off
engine (ignition) switch or open either door, automatic lock function will be
activated again.
95
Rear Door Child-protection Locks
Child-protection locks are

located inside the rear doors.
Turn the locking lever up and
down to lock and unlock the
UNLOCK LOCK child-protection lock as shown in
the illustration.
Lock: Push locking lever up
OMT15-3200
Unlock: Pull locking lever down
CAUTION
The rear door can only be opened from the outside when the child protection
locks are set. When children are in the vehicle, this function is recommended.
WARNING
● Make sure that all the doors are closed before driving.
● When small children are seated in the rear seats of the vehicle, the child-
protection locks should be used to prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally from the inside during driving.
● To avoid passengers from being trapped in the vehicle during a collision,
remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the
child-protection locks are set.
● Do not leave animals or children unattended inside a parked vehicle in hot
weather, otherwise interior heat built-up may cause serious injury within a
short time.
96
3-5. Anti-theft System
Your vehicle is equipped with two anti-theft systems: Engine

immobilizer system and vehicle anti-theft system.
Engine Immobilizer System
Smart keys have built-in transponder chips. Built-in transponder chips

prevent the engine from starting, if smart key has not been previously
registered in the engine immobilizer control module.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction:
3
● If smart key is in contact with a metallic object.
● If smart key is in close proximity to or touching smart key (key with
a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not modify or remove engine immobilizer system. If modified or removed,

the system may not operate properly.
Vehicle Anti-theft System
The system sounds an alarm and flashes turn signal lights when
forced entry is detected.
■ Setting vehicle anti-theft
● Turn off engine (ignition) switch, close doors, back door and
hood and lock all doors by using keyless entry function or
wireless remote control function. Vehicle anti-theft will be set
automatically.
● Successful setting hint: All doors and back door lock, turn signal
lights flash once and anti-theft alarm sounds once.
● If any door, hood, back door is not properly closed, vehicle anti-
theft cannot be set.
● Unsuccessful setting hint: Turn signal lights flash twice and anti-
theft system does not sound.
97
CAUTION
If any door is not properly closed, after setting vehicle anti-theft, all doors are
locked and then unlocked, anti-theft is not set successfully.
■ Triggering vehicle anti-theft

● Vehicle is in alarm mode, anti-theft may be triggered in the
followings.
Door, back door is locked in any way other than by using keyless
entry and wireless remote control.
For example: use mechanical key to unlock and open door.
● After system is triggered: Turn signal lights will flash and anti-
theft alarm will sound for 28 ± 2 seconds and after a 5-second
interval, they will flash and sound again for another 28 ± 2
seconds. This will be continued up to 3 times.
● During system is triggered: Close all doors, back door, hood or
turn off engine (ignition) switch, alarm will stop after completing
turn signal lights and anti-theft system.
■ Deactivating or stopping anti-theft alarm
Perform one of the following operations to deactivate or stop
alarm.
● Unlock doors using keyless entry or wireless remote control
function.
Successful deactivating hint: All doors and back door unlock,
turn signal lights flash twice and anti-theft system does not
sound.
● When the engine (ignition) switch is changed to the ON mode.
(Carrying smart key)
● When triggering vehicle anti-theft, after turn signal lights and
anti-theft alarm complete 3 cycles, vehicle alarm hint will stop.
98
CAUTION
To prevent unexpected triggering of the vehicle anti-theft system and vehicle

theft, make sure of the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows are closed before vehicle anti-theft is set (if equipped).
99
3-6. Horn
To sound horn, press on or close

to the horn mark on steering
wheel.
The horn will still work properly
off.
OMT15-3210
CAUTION
● Do not sound horn near schools, hospitals, or in places such as residential

areas.
● Obey local regulations regarding usage of vehicle horns.
100
3-7. Steering Wheel
Adjusting Steering Wheel
To drive safely and comfortably, you may want to adjust the

inclination angle of steering wheel.
To adjust steering wheel
position, keep vehicle on a safe
ground, turn off engine (ignition)
MODE SRS
AIRBAG
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
switch, push down adjustment

lever to move steering wheel
VOL
upward and downward. After

3
completing adjustment, pull
adjustment lever back to its
OMT15-3220
home position to secure steering

wheel in place.
WARNING
● Do not adjust steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause driver to
lose control of vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● For safety, try moving steering wheel up and down after adjusting to make
sure it is securely locked. Otherwise, steering wheel may move suddenly
during driving.
101
3-8. Windows
Power Windows
Driver's door power window switches can operate each passenger's

window.
1
2
3
SRS
AIRBAG
OMT15-3230
Driver's door power window switches are shown as follows:

Driver's power window switch
Front passenger's power window switch
Window lock switch
Rear left power window switch
Rear right power window switch
When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode, operate each window
switch can open or close respective window.
Window up-down switch has delay function, namely turn off engine
(ignition) switch and do not open any door within about 120 s, power
window switch also can operate.
102
Window auto-down*
Window auto-up*
Window manual-down
Window manual-up
*: To stop window partway,
operate the switch in the
opposite direction.
2
4
3
3 1
OMT15-3240
There is also one individual switch on each passenger's door that

operates each respective window.
Window auto-down*
Window auto-up*
Window manual-down
Window manual-up
*: To stop window partway,
operate the switch in the
opposite direction.
2
3 1
OMT15-3250
103
WARNING
● To avoid personal injury, check that all passengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being
operated.
● Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in vehicle. Otherwise,
he/she might operate power window switches and get caught by a window,
resulting in a serious accident.
■ One-key window down function

With engine (ignition) switch is turned off and all doors are closed,
press remote control unlock button and keep at least 1.5 s,
windows will go down. Windows will stop when releasing remote
control or opening any door during going down.
■ One-key window up function
With engine (ignition) switch is turned off and all doors are closed,
press the lock button on smart key or door handle switch, vehicle
enter alarm condition, windows will go up automatically. Press lock
button, unlock button or door handle switch again during window
go up automatically, window glass will stop.
CAUTION
When going up window automatically or using one-key window-up function,

make sure that there are no obstacles within window-up range, doing so may
cause that window does not close normally as jam protection reverse.
104
■ Jam protection function

Jam protection function operates normally, when going up
windows automatically or using one-key window-up function, jam
protection function will be activated while meeting obstacles in jam
protection area. Allowed maximum jam protection force of this
system is no more than 100 N, at the same time, the glass will
automatically stop and return a distance (150 mm). To close
window, should remove obstacle firstly, and then operate switch
again.
The jam protection function will stop detecting when window is fully
3
closed (within 4 m). Therefore, the paper-thin obstacle may not
trigger jam protection function during going up window.
If auto-up function and jam protection function do not operate,
please perform the following steps to recovery function, make sure
that there are no obstacles within window range during studying.
● When the engine (ignition) switch is changed to the ON mode.
● Operate window glass manually and continuously to go up to top
and keep 2 s.
● Release switch.
● Operate window glass manually and continuously to drop to
bottom and keep 2 s.
● Release switch.
● Try window auto-up function.
● If window can not be closed automatically, please repeat the
above procedures to set.
105
CAUTION
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
● Only set power window position successfully, jam protection function, one-
key window-up function, auto-up window function can operate normally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
● If disconnect battery cable and then reconnect it, auto-up window function
and jam protection function will not work. It is necessary to resume the
function.
● If operate power window repeatedly in a short period of time, it may not work
properly. It is necessary to operate power window again after several
minutes.
● Jam protection function belongs to window safety protection function. Do not
use various objects and improper methods to test jam protection, doing so
may damage system mechanism (such as motor, glass, lifter and glass
guide groove).
■ Cancel jam protection function

Meet obstacles when closing window twice continuously, jam
protection function will be canceled temporarily for 10 s. Window
provides maximum force of closing window within 10 s to close
window successfully in some extreme conditions, therefore, please
make sure that there are no obstacles during closing window to
avoid personal injuries.
Such as frosting or similar reasons to close the window difficultly,
the operation is as follows:
1. Close window twice continuously until the window meets
obstruction and goes back automatically.
2. Close the window for the third time within 10 s, jam protection
function will lose effectiveness, window will go up manually to
overcome resistance to close completely.
106
3. If the window still stop in the non-top position, it will continue to

cancel jam protection function, and perform maximum force of
window to close window when going up again.
4. If window can not be closed after several attempts, please
contact Chery authorized service station for check.
■ Overload thermal protection function
If the window is repeatedly operated in a short time, the window
regulator motor will burn due to overheating.
To protect the motor, operate the window to go up and down
continuously, overload thermal protection function will 3
automatically prohibit the corresponding window switch control.
The prohibition will be released when the motor returns to the
normal temperature, the function do not effect the up-down
function of other normal windows.
Window Lock Switch
If you press the window lock

switch, all the passengers' power
windows cannot be operated
SRS
AIRBAG
with their corresponding

windows. At this time, each
window can only be operated
with driver's door power window
OMT15-3260 switches. To cancel this function,
press the window lock switch
again.
When children are seated in vehicle, this function is recommended by
the Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
107
3-9. Hood
The hood release lever is located at the left lower part of the
driver's instrument panel.
■ Opening hood
1. Pull up the hood release lever,
and the hood will spring up
slightly.
OMT15-3270
2. Reach your hand to the center

part of the hood front end, and
contact with the auxiliary catch
lever. Then pull it up and lift
the hood at the same time.
OMT15-3510
3. Open the hood.
OMT15-9901
4. Before closing the hood, first fix the support rod to the groove, then
lower the hood and then let it fall into the pawl.
5. After closing the hood, lift the hood lightly to check that hood is fully
closed.
108
CAUTION
● Before closing the hood, check that you have not left any tools, rags etc. in
the engine compartment.
● The hood should be closed securely before driving. If you find that the hood
is not closed securely, you must stop the vehicle at a safe area immediately
and close the hood.
WARNING
3
Make sure that all the latches are engaged while driving. Otherwise, it will
have a risk of flying up and blocking your front sight when the vehicle is
moving, which could lead to an accident.
109
3-10.Fuel Tank Cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling
Turn engine (ignition) switch off and close all doors and windows.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
1. Pull up release lever and fuel
filler cap will spring up slightly.
OMT15-3280
1 2. To remove the fuel tank cap,

turn the cap counterclockwise.
Pause for a while before
removing it.
OMT15-3300
110
CAUTION
● It is normal to hear a slight swoosh when fuel tank cap is opened.

● Never add diesel to fuel tank.
WARNING
● Do not smoke or allow sparks or open flames when refueling. The gasoline
is flammable.
● When opening the fuel tank cap, do not remove it quickly. In hot weather, 3
fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out from the filler neck if
the cap is removed suddenly.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel, as fuel contains substances that are harmful to
health.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel filler cap, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
■ Closing fuel tank cap

1. After filling, turn cap clockwise
until you hear a click.
OMT15-3310
111
CAUTION
● Remove any spilt fuel immediately to avoid damaging vehicle and painted
surface while refueling.
● Loose your hand when fuel tank cap is fully tightened, the cap will turn
slightly in the opposite direction, but this is normal.
● To prevent damage to the cap, apply force only in the direction you are
turning it. Do not pull or pry it.
WARNING
Make sure the cap is tightened securely to prevent fuel spillage, causing an
accident.
2. Close the fuel filler cap.
Fuel may pollute the environment. The spilt fuel should be collected and
disposed of by professionals.
112
3-11.Seat belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Driver seat belt reminder light

When engine (ignition) switch is
turned to ON mode, if the driver
seat belt is not buckled or
04:02 20°C
0
fastened firmly, the reminder
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
light will continue to blink.

999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-3320
3
Front seat belt reminder light (if
equipped)
turned to ON mode, if the front
04:02 20°C
0
passenger seat belt is not
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
buckled or fastened firmly, the

999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
reminder light will continue to

OMT15-3321
blink.
If the seat belt is fastened, the reminder light on instrument cluster
will not illuminate and the buzzer will not sound; If the seat belt is
unfastened and the vehicle speed is lower than 25 km/h, seat belt
reminder light will flash, but the buzzer will not sound; If vehicle
speed is 25 km/h or higher, the reminder light will flash and the
buzzer will sound, the buzzer will stop sounding 100 seconds later,
however, as long as the seat belt remains unfastened, the reminder
light will flash continuously; If the seat belt is released while driving, it
alarms according to the description above.
If any of following conditions is met, the alarm will stop.
● Fasten the seat belt correctly.
● Turn off the engine (ignition) switch.
● Shift to the reverse gear.
113
CAUTION
Define vehicle speed as gauges and meters to indicate speed in this section.
We strongly urge the driver and

passengers to make sure that
their seat belts are worn correctly
at all times. Failure to do so
could increase possibility of
injury or severity of injury from
accidents. Please have the seat
OMT15-3330 belts checked regularly, if you
find that any of the seat belts
does not function correctly,
checked, repaired or replaced by
the Chery authorized service
station.
Correct Use of Seat Belt
● Adjust position of seatback.

Sit up straight and well back in
seat.
● Extend shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder,
but does not come into contact
with the neck or slide off the
OMT15-3340 shoulder.
● Position lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Do not twist seat belt.
114
Maintenance of Seat Belt
Seat belt should be inspected

regularly for damage or frays.
Seat belt must be checked
immediately and have relevant
components replaced at a Chery
authorized service station after it
is stretched, for example, in an
OMT15-3360 accident. 3
WARNING
Do not try to repair or lubricate retractor or buckle mechanism of seat belt, or
modify seat belt in any way. Otherwise, Chery Automobile Co., Ltd. will not be
responsible for any problem caused thereby.
Seat belt should be washed with

mild detergent or warm water.
Allow it to dry naturally instead of
manual heating.
OMT15-3370
WARNING
● Do not use chemical detergent, boiling water, bleach or dye to wash seat
belt.
● Do not allow water to penetrate belt retractor mechanism.
115
Fastening and Releasing Seat Belt
1 2 To fasten the seat belt, push

the tab into the buckle until a
click sound is heard.
To release seat belt, press the
release button.
If seat belt cannot retract
smoothly, pull it out and check
OMT15-3380
for kinks or twists. Make sure
seat belt remains smooth as it
retracts.
WARNING
● Make sure seat belt buckle position is properly and is locked safely, improper
matching may cause serious injury.
● Do not use a seat belt with a loose buckle. Otherwise, seat belts will not
protect passengers in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
Type of Three-point Seat Belts
ELR (emergency locking retractor) seat belt (if equipped). The belt is
locked when the belt is pulled out quickly, but it does not have an lock
mode when the belt is completely extended.
■ Adjust the position of the three-point type seat belt
Position of lap belt as low as
Take up possible on your hips - not on
slack your waist, then adjust it to a
Too high proper position by pulling
shoulder belt upward.
Keep as low on
hips as possible OMT15-3390
116
WARNING
● Ensure that all passengers wear their seat belts properly.

● One seat belt is only for one person. Do not use a seat belt for more than
one person at once, including children.
● We recommend that children be seated in rear seats and always use seat
belts or appropriate child restraint systems.
● Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across your shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure
to do so could reduce the effect of protection in an accident.
3
● Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting belts could cause serious
injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended events. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.
● Do not place shoulder belt under your arm.
● Do not recline seat more than necessary to achieve a comfortable ride. Seat
belts are most effective when passengers are sitting up straight and well
back in their seats.
● When pulling out seat belt, it may lock if too much effort is applied, or the
vehicle is on a slope.
● Do not wear loose and thick clothes. To achieve best protection, seat belt
should fit close to one's body.
Seat Belt Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster (Front Seats)
1 2 Push seat belt adjuster down

while pressing adjusting
button.
Push seat belt adjuster up
while pressing adjusting
button.
OMT15-3350
117
Rear Center Seat Belt
The rear center seat belt is a three-point type seat and belt with two
buckles. Both the seat belt buckles must be correctly located and
proper operated. Make sure passengers who use seat belts are
located on the center of seat belt.
1. When stowing center seat belt, belt return to top-left.
2. Rear center seat belt has two
2 1
buckles.
The two tabs have different
shapes to prevent the belt
from being buckled in wrong
place:
To fasten seat belt, pull out
OMT15-3400
the belt of rear seat center
three-point type seat belt from
left side, and insert small
buckle into left side of rear
center seat.
Sit up straight and then adjust
seat belt, insert big buckles
into right side of rear center
seat.
3. Stow rear center seat belt:
When inserting big buckle,
press "CENTER" of socket to
remove big buckle.
When inserting small buckle,
pressing button with
mechanical key to remove
OMT15-3311
small buckle as shown in the
illustration.
118
CAUTION
● We recommend that you should release small buckle to avoid locking seat
belt securely during using vehicle.
● When using rear center seat belt, insert proper buckle, failure to do so may
cause death or serious injury.
Stow Rear Seat Belt Buckles
4. Rear seat belt buckles should 3

be stowed when it is not in
use.
Seat belt buckles must be
stowed before you fold rear
seats.
OMT15-3880
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners (if equipped)
Driver and front passenger seat

belt pretensioners are designed
to be coordinated with frontal
airbags in response to a severe
impact.
When sensor detects a severe
impact unavoidable, seat belts
OMT15-3440
are quickly drawn back by
retractors so that seat belts
snugly restrain passengers.
Seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passenger in front
seat.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact.
119
Seat belt pretensioners and airbags will operate together in all

collisions.
When seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may
be heard and a small amount of nontoxic gas may be released.
This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. The gas is normally
harmless.
Once seat belt pretensioners are activated, seat belt retractors will
remain locked.
WARNING
● Do not modify, remove, strike or open seat belt pretensioner assemblies,

airbag sensor or wiring. Failure to may prevent seat belt pretensioners from
activating correctly and cause sudden operation of the system or disable the
system, which could result in death or serious injury.
● If pretensioners have been activated, SRS warning light will come on. In this
case, seat belts cannot be used again and must be replaced.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of following changes without consulting Chery Automobile

Co., Ltd. Such changes may interfere with correct operation of seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
● Repairs seat belt pretensioners or its surrounding assembly.
● Modification of suspension system.
● Modification of front end structure.
● Attachment of a grille guard or any other equipment to front end.
If any of following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of

airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Please contact a Chery authorized
service station as soon as possible.
● SRS warning light does not perform self-checking or remains on
when engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode.
● SRS warning light comes on while driving.
120
● Seat belts does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a

malfunction or activation of relevant seat belt pretensioner.
● Seat belt pretensioner assembly or its surrounding area has been
damaged.
Seat Belt Usage and Precautions for Children
Seat belts on your vehicle are principally designed for persons of

adult size. Use a child restraint system (refer to "Child Restraint
System" in this section) appropriate for child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear vehicle's seat belt. When the child 3
becomes large enough to properly wear vehicle's seat belt, follow
instructions regarding seat belt usage.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in
the rear seat and must be restrained using vehicle's seat belt.
Do not allow any children to
stand up or kneel on front seats,
rear seats. An unrestrained child
could suffer serious injury during
emergency braking or a collision.
Also, do not let a child sit on an
adult's knees. Holding a child in
OMT15-3570
arms cannot provide sufficient
restraint.
Seat Belt Usage and Precautions for Pregnant Women
Obtain medical advice and wear

seat belt in proper way. Women
who are pregnant should
position the lap belt as low as
possible over hips in the same
manner as other passengers.
OMT15-3450
121
Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position
the belt across the chest. Do not let the belt contact with the rounding
of abdominal area. If seat belt is not worn properly, not only the
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
WARNING
● Ensure that belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If seat belt is
not operated properly, immediately contact the Chery authorized service
station.
● Perform inspection carefully and replace the belts as necessary, if your
vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious
damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat
belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by the Chery authorized
service station.
● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the belt becomes twisted
around a child's neck, it could be impossible to pull the belt out, leading to
chocking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and
the buckles cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
● Inspect seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts.
● Do not use a damaged seat belt and replace it with a new one. A damaged
seat belt cannot protect an passengers from serious injury.
122
3-12.Airbag System SRS
SRS Warning Light

turned to ON mode, the light on
instrument cluster goes off after
illuminating for 6 seconds, which
04:02 20°C
0
indicates that SRS system oper-
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
ates normally.
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-3460
3
If any of the following situations occurs, it indicates that SRS has a
malfunction. Please contact the Chery authorized service station for
inspection and repair:
● When engine (ignition) switch is turned to ON mode, SRS warning
light does not come on, or the light keeps on or flashes.
● SRS warning light comes on or flashes during driving.
If your vehicle is equipped with SRS, it must be replaced at the tenth
year from date of production. Always have all the SRS assemblies
replaced at the Chery authorized service station.
123
Airbag System SRS
The airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of

severe impacts that may cause serious injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
1
2
OMT15-3505
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-
ger from impact with interior components
Front side airbag (if equipped)
Can help protect the torso of front occupants
Curtain shield airbag (if equipped)
Can help protect the head of occupants in the outer seats
124
Driver Airbag and Front Passenger Airbag
In response to a severe frontal

impact, driver airbag and front
passenger airbag work with the
seat belts to help reduce injuries
to the driver's or front passen-
ger's head or chest caused by
hitting the vehicle interior.
OMT15-3470
The front passenger airbag may 3
be activated even with no pas-
senger in the front seat.
Operating conditions: Generally,

when the vehicle receives a fron-
tal collision, driver airbag and
front passenger airbag will
deploy if the deceleration of vehi-
cle exceeds the designed thresh-
old level.
OMT15-3480
Driver airbag and front passen-

Frontal collision
with cylindrical ger airbag will deploy if the
object such
as pole, tree etc.
severity of frontal impact is
above the designed threshold
level, comparable to a certain
speed collision when vehicle
Oblique collision Under a truck
impacts straight into a fixed bar-
OMT15-3490 rier that does not move or
deform.
ger airbag may not inflate if the
vehicle strikes a telegraph pole
with its face slightly, goes under
125
a truck or the like, or if the vehi-

cle is involved in an oblique colli-
sion as shown in the illustration.

ger airbag may also deploy if a
Hitting a curb, Falling into or
serious impact occurs to the
edge of pavement jumping over a underside of your vehicle as
or hard surface deep hole
shown in illustration.
Landing hard or vehicle falling

OMT15-3500

ger airbag will usually not inflate
in the event of the side or rear
Collision from the rear
collision, roll over or low speed
frontal collision. But whenever a
collision of any type causes suffi-
Collision from the side
cient deceleration of vehicle,
Vehicle rollover
OMT15-3501 deployment of SRS airbags may
occur.
■ Front Side Airbag and Curtain Shield Airbag (if equipped)
Front side airbag and curtain
shield airbag are devices which
can provide more protection to
driver, front passenger and rear
outer passengers except seat
belts.
OMT15-3504
Front side airbag and curtain shield airbag may be activated even
with no passenger in the front seats and rear outer seats. Curtain
shield airbag can be activated even when front side airbag is not acti-
vated.
126
Operating conditions:
The severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level
(comparable to impact force when vehicle cabin is collided from a
direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at a certain speed).
shield airbag may not inflate if
the vehicle is subjected to a colli-
sion to the side of the vehicle
body other than the passenger
compartment, or a collision from 3
the side at certain angles as
shown in the illustration.
OMT15-3503

shield airbag do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in
Collision from the rear
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed side collision.
Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover
OMT15-3502
Airbag Precautions
● Airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The driver and all the passengers in the vehicle must wear their
seat belts properly.
● Driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the
airbag.
● Front passenger airbag deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is
very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be posi-
tioned as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger can sit upright.
127
● Front side airbag (if equipped) and curtain shield airbag (if
equipped) inflate with considerable force. Driver, front passenger
and rear outer passenger must fasten seat belt properly and keep
correct posture to reduce the possibility of death or personal injury
during inflating.
● Improper sitting or improperly restrained infants and children can
be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or
child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured
using a child restraint system. The Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
strongly recommends that all infants and children should be placed
in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear
seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger
seat.
● Do not sit on the edge of the

seat or lean against the dash-
board.
OMT15-3580
● Do not allow a child to stand in

front of the front passenger
airbag unit or sit on the knees
of the front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat
passenger to hold items on
OMT15-3570
his/her knees.
128
● Do not lean against the door,

the A pillar, B pillar or C pillar.
OMT15-3600
● Do not allow anyone to kneel

on the passenger seats 3
toward the doors or put their
heads or hands outside the
vehicle.
OMT15-3590
● Do not attach anything to or

lean anything against the
areas such as the dashboard,
steering wheel and lower por-
tion of the instrument panel.
P
These items can become pro-
jectiles when driver airbag and
R
OMT15-3550
front passenger airbag deploy.
● Do not attach anything to

areas such as the door, wind-
shield glass, side door glass,
A pillar, B pillar, C pillar, roof
side rail and assist grip.
OMT15-3610
129
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the airbag com-

ponents or surroundings. Doing so can cause the airbags to mal-
function.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after airbags
have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed,
open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it
is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to pre-
vent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the airbags are stored, such as the steering
wheel and instrument panel are damaged or cracked, have them
replaced at a Chery authorized service station.
Modification and Disposal of Airbag System Components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifi-

cations without consulting the Chery authorized service station. Oth-
erwise, airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not work on the following components without consent of the
Chery authorized service station:
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
● Repair, modification, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard and seats.
● Modification of the vehicle's suspension system.
130
3-13.Child Restraint System
A child restraint system for an infant or a child must be properly

restrained on seat using seat belt. You must carefully follow the
manufacturer's instructions provided with the child restraint system.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child. For installation details, follow
the instructions provided with the child restraint system. Only gen-
eral installation instructions are provided in this manual.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seats.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. 3
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured using the
seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger compart-
ment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident.
WARNING
● Child restraint system should conform to the safety standard specified by
local law. Chery Automobile Co., Ltd. will not accept any responsibility for
damages and accidents due to problem caused by child restraint system.
● Child restraint system must be installed on the rear seat subject to designa-
tion of Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
Types of Child Restraint System
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups

according to the regulation:
Mass Group Weight

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (0 - 9 months)
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (0 - 2 years)
Group I 9 to 18 kg (9 months - 4 years)
Group II 15 to 25 kg (4 years - 7 years)
Group III 22 to 36 kg (6 years - 12 years)
131
3 types of child restraint systems that can be secured with the seat
belts are explained in the manual.
Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
■ Baby (infant) seat
Equal to Groups 0 and 0+
OMT15-3730
■ Child (convertible) seat

Equal to Groups 0+ and I
OMT15-3620
■ Junior (booster) seat
Equal to Group II and III
OMT15-3630
132
WARNING
■ Child restraint system precautions:

● In order to protect the child effectively in accidents and sudden stops, he/
she must be properly restrained using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the his/her age and size. Holding a child in your arms is not
a substitute for a child restraint system.
● The Chery Automobile Co., Ltd. strongly urges the use of a proper child
restraint system that conforms to the size of the child and it should be
installed on the rear seat.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by 3
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■ Child restraint lock function and seat belts precautions:
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts with child restraint lock func-
tion. If the belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it could be impossible
to pull the belt out, leading to chocking or other serious injuries that could
result in death. If this occurs and the buckles cannot be unfastened, scissors
should be used to cut the belt.
■ When child restraint system is not in use:
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
an accident.
133
3-14.Installing Child Restraints System
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the seats using seat belts or ISOFIX rigid
anchors. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint system
as necessary.
Installation with Three-point Type Seat Belt
When installing the child restraint system, you should follow the child
restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
Depending on the type of your child restraint system, you will need a
locking clip to install a child restraint system properly. If your child
restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase
from the Chery authorized service station.
■ Installation and removal of baby (infant) seat
A baby (infant) seat must be used in rear-facing way only.
1. Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat facing the
rear of the vehicle.
OMT15-3741
134
WARNING
● Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the
lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occu-
pant may be killed or seriously injured in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
● If the driver's seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat. 3
OMT15-3750
2. Run the seat belt through

baby (infant) seat following the
instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the
tab into the buckle.
Take care not to twist the belt.
Keep the lap belt tight.
OMT15-3760
3. Install a locking clip beside to

the tab of the lap and shoulder
belts.
OMT15-3640
135
WARNING
● After inserting the tab, make sure that the tab and buckle are locked and that
lap and shoulder belts are not twisted.
● Do not insert coins, clips, etc. into the buckle as this may prevent you from
properly latching the tab and buckle.
● If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from
death or serious injury. Please contact the Chery authorized service station
immediately. Do not install any child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
● Push and pull the child restraint system

in different directions to be sure it is
installed securely. Follow all the instal-
lation instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
OMT15-3770
To remove child restraint system,

remove locking clip first, press
buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely.
The belt will move freely and be
ready to work for an adult or
older child passenger.
OMT15-3650
■ Installation and removal of child (convertible) seat

A child (convertible) seat must be used in forward-facing and rear-
facing way depending on the age and size of the child. When
installing, follow the manufacturer's instructions regarding its appli-
cable age, child size and installing direction.
136
Please refer to "Installation and removal of baby (infant) seat" in

this section for its installing and removing procedures in rear-facing
way.
Follow the procedures below to install/remove a child restraint sys-
tem in forward-facing way.
tem on rear seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
OMT15-3660
WARNING
If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from
being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear
seat.
2. Run the seat belt through the

child (convertible) seat follow-
ing the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert
the tab into the buckle.
Take care not to twist the belt.
Keep the lap belt tight.
OMT15-3670
137
WARNING
seat belt is fixed.
3. While pressing the child (con-

vertible) seat firmly against the
seat cushion and seatback, let
the shoulder belt retract as far
as it will go to hold the child
(convertible) seat securely.
OMT15-3680
4. Install a locking clip beside to

the tab of the lap and shoulder
belts.
OMT15-3640
138
WARNING
seat belt is fixed.
3
● Push and pull the child restraint system
in different directions to be sure it is
installed securely. Follow all the instal-
lation instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
OMT15-3690
To remove child restraint system,

remove locking clip first, press
buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely.
The belt will move freely and be
ready to work for an adult or
older child passenger.
OMT15-3650
139
■ Installation and removal of junior (booster) seat

A junior (booster) seat is used in forward-facing way only.
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
OMT15-3710
2. Sit the child on a junior

(booster) seat. Run the seat
belt through or around junior
(booster) seat following the
instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the
tab into the buckle. Take care
OMT15-3720 not to twist the belt.
Make sure that the shoulder belt is correctly across the child's shoul-
der and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's
hips. Refer to "Correct Use of Seat Belt" in this section for details.
140
WARNING
● Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child's neck, but not falling off
child's shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in the
event of sudden braking or a collision.
● Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting lap belts could cause death
or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child's hips as
possible.
● After inserting the tab, make sure that the tab and buckle are locked and that 3
● Do not insert coins, clips, etc.into the buckle as this may prevent you from
seat belt is fixed.
To remove the child restraint sys-

tem, press the buckle release
button and allow the belt to
retract.
OMT15-3700
141
Precautions for Installing Child Restraint System on Front Pas-

senger Seat
When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, please observe the following precautions:
Never use a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. The force of the
rapid deployment (inflation) of
the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to
the child in the event of an acci-
dent.
Warning labels on front passen-
ger side sun visor remind you not
to install a rear-facing child
OMT15-3780 restraint system on front passen-
ger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint

system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when it
is unavoidable. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger
Move seat
fully back seat, move the seat as far back
OMT15-3790 as possible. Failing to do so may
result in death or serious injury if
the front passenger airbag
deploys (inflates).
142
Installation of Child Restraint with Anchors (ISO-FIX Child

Restraint System)
1. Identify 2 of lower anchors that

used to secure child restraint
system.
tem on seat.
3
OMT15-3801
3. Latch the lower buckles of the
child restraint onto the lower
anchors firmly.
4. Pull out the top strap of the
child restraint, and latch it onto
the anchor bracket on back of
the seatback.
OMT15-3800
Refer to "Child Restraint System with a Top Strap" in this section for
installation with a strap. For installation details, refer to the instruction
manual provided with each product.
143
WARNING
● It is not allowed to install child restraint system with anchors if the child
weight is over 22 kg.
● Please go to a Chery authorized service station for replacement if any
anchor is damaged or overloaded in accident.
● Never secure more than one child restraint system to the same set of
anchors.
Child Restraint Systems with a Top Strap
Anchor brackets are located on

nt
Fr
o back of the rear seatbacks.
Anchor brackets
OMT15-3810
It is necessary to use a strap if installing the child restraint system

according to procedures below. Perform the followings to secure the
child restraint system using seat belt and anchors:
1. Adjust the height of head
restraint or remove it if neces-
sary.
OMT15-3820
144
Front 2. Run the top strap through the

head restraint. Latch the hook
of the top strap onto the
anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
OMT15-3830
WARNING
● Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint 3
system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all
the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
● Do not use the anchor brackets to

secure objects expect a child restraint
system. The Chery Automobile Co.,
Ltd. will not be responsible for any
problem caused thereby.
OMT15-3850
3. Return head restraint to a

proper position and lock it
securely.
OMT15-3840
145
WARNING
● When installing the child restraint system, please follow the directions given
in the child restraint system instruction manual and fix it securely in place.
● If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● If the driver's seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
OMT15-3860
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Ensure that the belt and the tab are locked in place and the belt is not
twisted.
● Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is
installed securely.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
146
STARTING AND
Section 4
DRIVING VEHICLE
4-1. Engine (Ignition) Switch 4-5. Manual Transmission........ 170

(Keyless Entry & Start Gear Shifting..................... 171
System) ......................... 150 Shifting Hints..................... 171
Electric Steering Downshifting ..................... 172
Column Lock
(for MT Model) .............. 152 4-6. Brake System ................... 173
Parking Brake ................... 173
4-2. Starting Engine ................. 154
Brake ................................ 174
Preparation Before
Vacuum Booster ............... 175
Starting ......................... 154
Brake Fluid........................ 175
Normal Starting
Procedure ..................... 154 Brake System Warning
Light .............................. 176
After Starting..................... 155
Operation Precautions ...... 177
Turning Off Engine ........... 155
Loss of Brake
Starting and Stopping
Effectiveness................. 178
Engine in an
Emergency.................... 156
4-7. Anti-lock Brake
4-3. Continuously Variable System (ABS)................ 179
Transmission (CVT) ...... 159 Operation Precautions ...... 179
Gear Position ABS Braking ..................... 181
Description .................... 159 ABS Warning Light ........... 182
4-4. Dual Clutch 4-8. Electronic Stability

Transmission (DCT) ...... 164 Program (ESP) .............. 183
Gear Position ESP Warning Light ........... 183
Description .................... 164 ESP OFF Switch............... 184
ECO/Sport Mode .............. 168 Hill Hold Control
Fail-safe Mode .................. 169 System (HHC)............... 185
147
Hydraulic Brake Assist High Temperature
System (HBA) ............... 185 Warning......................... 195
Traction Control
System (TCS) ............... 185 4-13. Parking Sensor
Assistant System
4-9. Hydraulic Power (PAS)............................. 196
Steering System............ 186 Parking Sensor
Power Steering Fluid ........ 186 Assistant System
(4-sensor)...................... 196
4-10. Electric Power Steering Parking Sensor
System (EPS) Assistant System
(if equipped) .................. 187 (8-sensor)
(if equipped) .................. 198
4-11. Constant Speed PAS Switch ....................... 199
Cruising ......................... 188 Instructions for Use........... 201
Operating Procedure ........ 188 Cleaning Parking
Adjusting Set Speed ......... 189 Sensor........................... 204
Canceling/Resuming
Cruise Control ............... 190 4-14. Panoramic View Monitor
Situations Unsuitable System (if equipped) ..... 205
for Cruise Control.......... 191 Camera Distribution .......... 205
Turning On and Off
4-12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Panoramic View
System (TPMS) Monitor System ............. 206
(if equipped) .................. 192 Switching One-sided
TPMS Display ................... 192 and Surrounding
System Malfunction View .............................. 207
Warning ........................ 193 Three-dimensional
Low Pressure Warning ..... 194 Surrounding
Roaming........................ 208
148
Three-dimensional 4-18. Winter Driving ................... 221
Left/Right Side View ..... 208 Winter Driving Tips ........... 221
Static/Dynamic Reverse Driving on Road
Guideline....................... 209 Covered with Ice
Local View of and Snow ...................... 222
Rear Area ..................... 210 Tire Chains ....................... 223
4-15. Operation Safety 4-19. How to Save Fuel

Precautions ................... 211 and Extend Life
Before Starting Engine ..... 211 of Vehicle ...................... 224
After Starting Engine ........ 212
When Driving .................... 213
Operations for Parking...... 213
Parking on Slope .............. 214
Carrying Passengers ........ 215
Locking Vehicle ................ 215
Exhaust Gas ..................... 216
Checking Exhaust
System .......................... 216
4-16. Off-road Driving

Precautions ................... 217
4-17. Driving in the Rain ............ 218

When Driving on
Slippery Road
Surfaces........................ 218
Driving Through Water ..... 219
149
Section 4. STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE
4-1. Engine (Ignition) Switch (Keyless Entry & Start System)
There are four modes for engine (ignition) switch. With legal smart
key detected by system and brake pedal released, press engine
(ignition) switch to switch modes. The mode changes each time the
engine (ignition) switch is pressed.
OFF mode
The hazard light can be used.
ACC mode
Some electrical appliances
(such as cigarette lighter) can
be used.
Engine (ignition) switch
indicator changes to amber.
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
ON mode
All electrical appliances can
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
be used.
Engine (ignition) switch
indicator changes to amber.
OMT15-4000
START mode
If engine (ignition) switch indicator changes to green when brake
pedal is depressed and shift lever is in P or N position (for CVT and
DCT models), or when clutch pedal is depressed (for MT model) in
any mode, it indicates that engine (ignition) switch has turned to
START mode. Press engine (ignition) switch to start engine.
150
Color of the engine (ignition)

switch indicator varies
RES/-
depending on the different
modes.
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
OMT15-4001
The indicator does not come on.

● Engine (ignition) switch is in OFF mode and brake pedal (for
CVT and DCT models) or clutch pedal (for MT model) is not
depressed.
4
● Engine has been started.
STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE

The indicator light comes on (amber)
Engine (ignition) switch is in ACC or ON mode and brake pedal (for
CVT and DCT models) or clutch pedal (for MT model) is not
depressed.
The indicator light comes on (green)
For CVT and DCT models:
With shift lever in P or N position, brake pedal depressed and
indicator ON (green), press engine (ignition) switch to start engine.
For MT model:
With clutch pedal depressed, press engine (ignition) switch to start
engine.
CAUTION
● For CVT and DCT models, if engine is turned off when shift lever is in a
position other than P, the engine (ignition) switch will be turned to ACC
mode, not to OFF mode.
● If smart key is moved away during normal engine starting, engine will not
stall automatically, theft deterrent alarm sounds 6 times, and "No Smart Key
in Range" is displayed on instrument cluster.
151
■ Auto power off function

When shift lever is in P position, if vehicle is in ACC mode for more
than 20 minutes or in ON mode for more than 1 hour with engine
not running, the engine (ignition) switch will automatically turns off.
However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery from being
depleted.
Do not leave the engine (ignition) switch in ACC or ON mode for a
long time with engine not running.
■ Operating engine (ignition) switch
When operating engine (ignition) switch, one short and firm press
is enough.
If the engine (ignition) switch is pressed improperly, engine may
not start or engine (ignition) switch mode may not change.
Electric Steering Column Lock (for MT Model)
On MT model, the steering column lock will be unlocked when front

left door is opened after turning engine (ignition) switch to OFF mode.
Press engine (ignition) switch with smart key in vehicle, and steering
column is unlocked when switch is turned to ACC or ON mode.
In some cases, such as when vehicle is stopped on a hill, there is a
large stress between lock pin and steering column, and lock pin may
be struck, here:
1. System will try to perform unlock operation 3 times within 3
seconds.
2. If steering lock fails to unlock, perform relevant operations
according to the prompted messages displayed on instrument
cluster.
152
CAUTION
● If steering lock fails to unlock, try to turn steering wheel to left or right after
pressing the engine switch. Do not turn steering wheel forcibly.
● For safety, if steering lock cannot be released, the system will be powered
off and the engine cannot be started. Please contact a Chery authorized
service station as soon as possible for inspection and repair.
WARNING
If vehicle begins to slide due to engine failure or other circumstances, do not

open or close doors until vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation
of steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
serious injury or even death. 4
153
4-2. Starting Engine
Preparation Before Starting
1. Be sure to check area around vehicle before getting in.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height and
steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust angle of inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Turn off unnecessary lights and electrical appliances.
5. Fasten the seat belt.
6. Confirm that parking brake lever is pulled up firmly.
7. For CVT and DCT models, shift the shift lever to P or N position.
For MT model, shift the shift lever to neutral position.
8. Turn engine (ignition) switch to ON mode, and check if warning
lights and indicators on instrument cluster are normal. If abnormal,
please contact a Chery authorized service station for inspection
and repair immediately.
Normal Starting Procedure
Start engine or change engine (ignition) switch mode when carrying

smart key on your person.
1. Firmly depress brake pedal (for CVT and DCT models) or clutch
pedal (for MT model).
Engine (ignition) switch indicator changes to green. If indicator
does not change to green, the engine cannot be started.
2. Press engine (ignition) switch

to start engine.
RES/-
When indicator changes to
green, engine can be started
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
with engine (ignition) switch in

any mode.
OMT15-4002
154
After Starting
Engine idle speed is controlled by electrical control system. When

engine is started, the high speed can help to increase engine
temperature. After the temperature increases, engine speed will
automatically decrease to normal speed. If not, please contact a
Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair
immediately.
WARNING
Exhaust gas contains harmful substance which may lead to a serious health
hazard if inhaled. To avoid inhaling exhaust gas, following measures should be
taken:
4
● Do not run engine for a long time in a confined area, such as a garage, etc.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with engine running in an open

area, set the air conditioning to positive ventilation and the blower to high
speed.
Turning Off Engine
1. Stop vehicle and apply parking

brake.
SET/-
RES/-
2. For CVT and DCT models,
shift the shift lever to P or N
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
position.
For MT model, shift the shift
lever to N position.
OMT15-4003
3. Press the engine (ignition)
switch.
4. Release brake pedal (for CVT
and DCT models) or clutch
pedal (for MT model), check
that engine (ignition) switch
indicator turns off.
155
For CVT and DCT models, if engine is stopped with shift lever in a
position other than P, the engine (ignition) switch will not turn off but
turns to ACC mode. Perform following operations to turn off the
switch:
1. Check that parking brake has been applied.
2. Shift the shift lever to P position.
3. Press engine (ignition) switch once. Check that indicator on engine
(ignition) switch turns off.
CAUTION
● Do not depress accelerator pedal before engine is turned off.

● After driving at a high speed for a long time, engine temperature may be
high, so please do not turn off the engine immediately when vehicle is
stopped. Run engine at idle speed for several minutes, and turn off engine
after its temperature drops. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the engine.
Starting and Stopping Engine in an Emergency
■ Starting engine in an emergency

When smart key battery is low or frequency signal is seriously
interfered, the smart entry and start system will not operate
normally. In this case, start engine by following steps below.
156
1. Place smart key into bottom of

1 2
cup holder horizontally with
right side facing upward. In
this case, do not depress
brake pedal (for CVT and DCT
models) or clutch pedal (for
MT model).
2. Press engine (ignition) switch
to turn it to ON mode.
OMT15-4420
4
3. After "Start Ready" is
displayed on multi-information

Start Ready display, depress brake pedal
19:41 ECO 12.0°C
(for CVT and DCT models) or
Start Ready
clutch pedal (for MT model),
5185 km
and press engine (ignition)
P
switch to start engine.

C H E F
x1000
km/h rpm
OMT15-4440
CAUTION
For CVT/DCT model, when engine (ignition) switch is long pressed for more
than 15 seconds with engine (ignition) switch in ACC mode and brake pedal
not depressed, the system will ignore the brake pedal signal, and engine also
can start. When brake pedal is not available, this function is not suggested to
be used to start and drive the vehicle unless in a special condition. Please
contact a Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair.
157
■ Stopping engine in an emergency

If you want to stop engine in an emergency, please perform
operation according to following methods:
Method 1: Press engine (ignition) switch briefly 3 times or more in
succession within 2 seconds.
Method 2: Press and hold engine (ignition) switch for more than 3
seconds.
158
4-3. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in your vehicle is

electronically controlled to achieve maximum power and smooth
operation.
Operation procedures for the transmission are as follows:

1. Fully depress brake pedal and move shift lever to driving position
from P or N position.
2. Release parking brake lever and brake pedal, and drive vehicle
slowly.
WARNING
It is necessary to apply parking brake regardless of the shift lever position 4

when engine is not running. Otherwise, vehicle may slip accidentally and
cause serious injury or property damage.

Gear Position Description
VOL
E s
R
N
+
D
M L
-
OMT15-4030
159
This transmission contains P, R, N, D, L and M positions, which are

marked with corresponding gear letter on gear shift indication panel.
This transmission is equipped with sport mode, which can be turned
on using sport mode switch on air conditioning panel.
Gear shifting can be performed by operating shift lever.
During operation, select corresponding gear based on the actual
requirement. Following information helps you to understand the
purpose and operation procedures of different gear positions, so as
to make a correct selection.
Before operation, make sure that you have understood the following
information.
■ P (Park) position
E s
VOL
This is the park position, which can
P lock drive wheels mechanically.
Engine can be started.
OMT15-4040
CAUTION
● P position can be used only when vehicle is completely stopped. Do not shift
the shift lever to P position while driving.
● Before shifting out of P position, turn engine (ignition) switch to ON mode
and fully depress brake pedal.
● Do not use P position instead of parking brake.
160
■ R (Reverse) position
E s
VOL
This is the reverse position. With
R shift lever in this position, back-
up light will come on while
parking sensor assistant system
and panoramic view monitor
system (if equipped) will operate.
OMT15-4041
■ N (Neutral) position
E s
VOL
This is the neutral position,
N which can start the engine.
4
It is suitable for stopping vehicle
at idling in a short time.

OMT15-4042
CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to N position when driving at high speed. This
operation may cause transmission damage easily.
● When engine stalls, do not let vehicle slide at N position. This operation may
cause transmission damage easily.
WARNING
When shift lever is in N position, make sure that parking brake lever is pulled
up and brake pedal is depressed. Failure to do so may cause accident.
161
■ D (Forward Drive) position
E s
VOL
This is the driving position.
D Upshifting and downshifting can
be automatically switched
among all driving positions
based on engine load and
vehicle speed.
OMT15-4043
■ L (Low Speed) position
E s
VOL
This is the low speed position, it
L is a driving position that is used
to drive at low speed, vehicle
may fully use the engine power
to drive forward or brake during
driving on downhill.
OMT15-4045
■ M (Manual) position
E s
VOL
This is the manual mode position.
1 With shift lever in this position,
driver can perform upshifting and
downshifting operations manually.
This transmission is provided with
7 driving positions for selection.
You can switch between M and D
OMT15-4044 positions at any time.
● M+: Transmission will increase one gear each time the shift lever is
pushed to M+.
● M-: Transmission will decrease one gear each time the shift lever is
pushed to M-.
162
CAUTION
● In manual mode, switching operation among the manual gear positions

should be matched with the engine speed and vehicle speed. If it does not
meet the requirement, transmission will not perform shifting operations.
● In manual mode, upshifting operation cannot be performed automatically,
and must be performed by pushing shift lever by driver; however, if engine
speed is excessively high, gear will increase automatically. Also, when
engine speed is excessively low, gear will decrease automatically.
163
4-4. Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT)
Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT), equipped on your vehicle, is a

electronically controlled automatic shift transmission, it has both
manual and automatic shift modes.
Operation procedures for the transmission are as follows:

1. Fully depress brake pedal, press button on shift handle and move
shift lever to driving position from P position.
2. Release parking brake lever
and brake pedal, and drive
OFF
AUTO
vehicle slowly.
3. When shifting in or out of the
VOL
R position, it is necessary to
S
E
press button on shift handle.
OMT15-4516
Gear Position Description
VOL
E s
P
R
N +
M
D -
OMT15-4510
164
This transmission contains P, R, N, D position for automatic and

manual modes, which are marked with corresponding gear letter on
gear position indication panel.
This transmission is equipped with sport mode, which can be turned
on using sport mode switch on air conditioning panel.
Gear shifting can be performed by operating shift lever.
During operation, select corresponding gear based on the actual
requirement. Following information helps you to understand the
purpose and operation procedures of different gear positions, so as
to make a correct selection.
Before operation, make sure that you have understood the following
information.
■ P (Park) position 4
This is the park position, which

VOL
E s
P can lock drive wheels

mechanically.
Engine can be started.
OMT15-4511
CAUTION
● P position can be used only when vehicle is completely stopped. Do not shift
the shift lever to P position while driving.
● Before shifting out of P position, turn engine (ignition) switch to ON mode,
fully depress brake pedal and press and hold button on shift handle to switch
to other gear positions from P position.
● Do not use P position instead of parking brake.
165
■ R (Reverse) position
E s
VOL
This is the reverse position. With
R shift lever in this position, back-
up light will come on while
parking sensor assistant system
and panoramic view monitor
system (if equipped) will operate.
OMT15-4512
■ N (Neutral) position
E s
VOL
This is the neutral position,
N which is suitable for stopping
vehicle at idling in a short time.
OMT15-4513
CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to N position when driving at high speed. This
operation may cause transmission damage easily.
● When engine stalls, do not let vehicle slide at N position. This operation may
cause transmission damage easily.
WARNING
When shift lever is in N position, make sure that parking brake lever is pulled
up and brake pedal is depressed. Failure to do so may cause accident.
166
■ D (Forward Drive) position
E s
VOL
This is the driving position.
D Upshifting and downshifting can
be automatically switched
among all driving positions
based on engine load and
vehicle speed.
OMT15-4514
■ M (Manual) position
E s
VOL
This is the manual mode
1 position. With shift lever in this
4
position, driver can perform
upshifting and downshifting

operations manually. This
transmission is provided with 6
driving positions for selection.
OMT15-4515 You can switch between M and
D positions at any time.
● M+: Transmission will increase one gear each time the shift lever is
pushed to M+.
● M-: Transmission will decrease one gear each time the shift lever is
pushed to M-.
CAUTION
● In manual mode, switching operation among the manual gear positions

should be matched with the engine speed and vehicle speed. If it does not
meet the requirement, transmission will not perform shifting operations.
● In manual mode, upshifting operation cannot be performed automatically,
and must be performed by pushing shift lever by driver; however, if engine
speed is excessively high, upshifting will be performed automatically. Also,
when engine speed is excessively low, downshifting will be performed
automatically.
167
ECO/SPORT Mode
■ Selecting ECO mode

The default mode of system is
ECO ECO mode when engine is
started. "ECO" symbol on
instrument cluster display comes
on.
E S
Vehicle switches between ECO
P
L
mode and SPORT mode when
OMT15-4047
" E S " switch is pressed, and
you can select mode depending
on the different road conditions.
■ Selecting SPORT mode
When " E S " switch is pressed
SPORT with engine (ignition) switch in
ON mode, "SPORT" symbol on
instrument cluster display comes
on and system enters sport
driving mode. System will exit
E S
R
SPORT mode and enter ECO
mode when the switch is
N
OMT15-4046
pressed again.
168
Fail-safe Mode
When malfunction occurs in transmission system, fail-safe mode will

activate automatically to allow the vehicle to be driven for a short
distance in an emergency. In this case, transmission malfunction
warning light on instrument cluster will come on.
When fail-safe mode is activated, transmission will be unable to
operate in the normal selection mode, and vehicle speed will
decrease gradually and vehicle will run at low speed.
CAUTION
Long distance driving is not allowed in this mode, as this could easily damage
the transmission. Please contact a Chery authorized service station as soon 4
as possible to have the transmission inspected and repaired.
169
4-5. Manual Transmission
VOL
E s
OMT15-4031
Manual transmission has six forward positions and one reverse

position. Gear position layout is shown in above illustration.
E s
VOL
There is a reverse gear lock in
manual transmission, lift the
reverse gear lock switch upward
and then push the shift lever to
shift to reverse position.
OMT15-4032
170
Gear Shifting
■ Methods of gear shifting

1. Fully depress clutch pedal first when operating forward gear,
and then move the shift lever to the desired gear position.
2. Completely stop vehicle first when operating reverse gear, and
then move the shift lever to reverse position.
3. Always hold shift lever knob with your hand when shifting to
complete the operation skillfully and quickly. This can greatly
reduce wear of the internal parts of transmission.
4. Do not leave your hand on the shift lever knob after shifting.
Shifting Hints 4
Instrument cluster matches the target gear information and upshifting

and downshifting signals when shifting hints are displayed, to alert
the driver to perform upshifting or downshifting operation.
■ Precautions for gear shifting
1. Always use the 1st gear when vehicle starts off.
2. When driving downhill and turning, always use a low gear, and
never coast in neutral position.
3. Do not skip a gear when shifting from low gear to high gear.
4. If abnormal phenomenons are found in transmission, such as
abnormal noises and heavy operation, etc., please stop vehicle
immediately at a safe area and contact a Chery authorized
service station for inspection and repair. After the trouble is
solved, you can continue to drive vehicle.
5. Never shift to reverse gear when driving forward, or it will cause
damage to transmission.
6. During normal driving, do not leave your foot on clutch pedal to
avoid unnecessary wear to clutch.
171
Downshifting
1. To ensure safe driving, downshift to a proper gear when driving

down steep hills.
2. For better acceleration efficiency, downshift to a proper gear when
starting to accelerate again.
3. Perform downshifting in sequence and do not skip gears.
CAUTION
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface.

Otherwise, drive wheels could lose their traction, which could cause the
wheels to slip, resulting in a loss of vehicle control.
172
4-6. Brake System
Ventilated disc type brakes are used on front wheels of vehicle, while
disc type brakes are used on rear wheels. Mechanical cable type
parking brake is used to act on the rear wheels.
Parking Brake

1 2
OMT15-4110
After parking vehicle, firmly pull up the parking brake lever to

prevent vehicle from moving. Parking brake indicator light will
come on at the same time.
173
WARNING
To avoid an unexpected move, do not use shift lever as a substitute for parking
brake when parking or leaving your vehicle. You should pull up parking brake
lever firmly.
To release parking brake, pull up parking brake lever slightly, then

push release button at top of the knob to release parking brake
lever completely. Parking brake indicator light on the instrument
cluster will go off at the same time.
CAUTION
Make sure that parking brake lever is released completely before driving.
Failure to do so may increase rear brake wear.
Brake
Brake system is "X" type dual

circuit brake system. It is a
hydraulic system which has two
independent subsystems. If one
of the subsystems fails, the other
can still achieve brake function.
However, brake pedal should be
OMT15-4120 depressed more firmly than
usual and braking distance will
become longer. Brake system
warning light will also come on.
WARNING
Do not drive vehicle with only one brake system operating. Please contact a
Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair immediately.
174
Vacuum Booster
Brake booster is controlled by engine vacuum and it works only when

engine is running. Therefore, do not turn engine off to coast the
vehicle while driving downhill.
WARNING
Do not turn engine off to coast the vehicle while driving downhill. For better
braking efficiency, shift to the lower gear before driving downhill.
If vehicle is being towed or malfunctioning, vacuum booster will not

work. It is necessary to depress brake pedal harder to compensate
for the booster assist effect. 4
Brake Fluid

Normal brake fluid level should
be between "MAX" and "MIN"
lines.
Periodically check the brake fluid
MAX level.
MIN
OMT15-9902
175
WARNING
● Brake fluid has strong hygroscopy. Do not leave the brake fluid reservoir cap
open for a long time.
● Brake fluid is corrosive, never directly touch it with your hands. If brake fluid
splashes on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, get emergency medical
attention immediately.
Brake System Warning Light

turned to ON mode, this warning
light will go off after illuminating
04:02 20°C
for 3 seconds. If it does not go off
0
km/h
or comes on during driving, it
I.F.C.
8.9 L/100km
Trip
259 km
999999 km
indicates that the brake system
is malfunctioning. Please check
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-4140 the brake fluid level first, and add

brake fluid if necessary. If causes
cannot be found, please contact
a Chery authorized service
station to have the brake system
inspected as soon as possible.
176
Operation Precautions
● It is normal that brake system makes a noise sometimes. However,

if it make noises that sound like metal grinding or screeches for a
long time, it indicates that brake lining may be seriously worn.
Please contact a Chery authorized service station for replacement.
● If there is continuous shudder or vibration being transferred to
steering wheel during braking, please contact a Chery authorized
service station for inspection and repair immediately.
● New brake lining requires a break-in period to achieve optimum
braking effect. Braking effect may decrease slightly in the first 200
km. In this case, increase depressing force properly on the brake
pedal to compensate for the braking effect. 4
● Brake lining wear greatly depends on operating conditions and

driving habits of operator. For vehicles mainly used for city traffic,
frequent starting off and stopping will make working condition of
brake lining worsen. Therefore, it is necessary to send your vehicle
to a Chery authorized service station to check thickness of brake
lining or replace it with a new one according to the specified
maintenance mileage.
● When driving downhill, shift to a low gear to make full use of the
engine braking effect and avoid continuous use of the bakes.
Failure to do so may cause brakes to overheat and lengthen the
braking distance, and brakes may even temporarily lose their
effectiveness in a serious case.
● A damp brake may cause abnormal speed deceleration or drifting
during braking. Depress brake pedal slightly to test the effects on
brakes. After driving through deep water, it is necessary to keep a
safe vehicle speed and depress brake pedal slightly until braking
function is restored.
177
Loss of Brake Effectiveness
If you lose control of brakes during driving, you can stop vehicle using
parking brake, but stopping distance will be longer than that during
normal braking.
WARNING
During normal driving, applying parking brake suddenly will cause loss control
of vehicle instantaneously. If it is necessary to stop vehicle using the parking
brake, please apply force slowly to prevent drifting due to rear wheel lock. You
should keep fully alert during driving.
178
4-7. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is an active safety system. Its main function is to maintain

vehicle maneuverability and driving stability using ground traction at
maximum. However, ABS cannot prevent vehicle slippage absolutely
when it exceeds physical limits or driving on slippery road at high
speed.
ABS is integrated with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system, making the system performance more effective.
ABS operates only when wheels

are going to lock during sudden
braking, but not operate during
normal braking. If brake pedal 4
pulsates with noise during

braking, it indicates that the
system is operating, which is
OMT15-4150 normal. Do not release brake
pedal at this moment.
Operation Precautions
ABS will make noises in following conditions:

1. A short "buzz" sound occurs when system performs self-check
after vehicle is powered on or engine is started.
2. Operation sound of motor, solenoid valve and return pump in
hydraulic unit.
3. Sound caused by brake pedal rebound.
4. Operation sound of solenoid valve when EBD is involved in
braking.
5. Impacting sound between suspension and vehicle body due to
emergency braking.
179
WARNING
● Do not overestimate the functions of anti-lock brake system. Although anti-

lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is necessary to drive
carefully and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle
ahead, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and steering
performance even if anti-lock brake system operates.
● If tire grip performance exceeds its permissible capability, or if wheel spin
occurs during driving at high speed in rain, the anti-lock brake system will
not provide vehicle control.
CAUTION
■ Tire size, specification and tread pattern wear have a significant impact
on the normal ABS performance, please ensure that the replaced tire
has the same size, load capacity and structure with the original tire. It
is recommended to replace tires with the original type at a Chery
■ ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance.
Always maintain a safe distance from vehicle in front of you in
following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads;
● When driving with tire chains;
● When driving on rough roads;
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces.
180
ABS Braking
ABS will start immediately in

Important principle to sudden braking to maintain
use the ABS brake braking and steering
performance. If there is enough
space, you can even avoid
1.Firmly depress
and hold the
obstacles.
brake pedal.

2.Turn the steering
wheel to avoid the obstacles. You can
keep turning performance whenever
you make an emergency braking. OMT15-4160
WARNING
● Although ABS can ensure the best braking efficiency, stopping distance will
be greatly different based on the road conditions.
● ABS will not shorten the stopping distance under any circumstances, such
as when equipped with tire chain, or on sand or snow covered road.
Compared with vehicle without ABS, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance.
● Also, ABS cannot eliminate risks arising from driving too near to the vehicle
ahead, driving through water, turning quickly or driving on poor road
surfaces, and cannot avoid accidents caused by inattentive or inappropriate
driving.
● Always drive carefully and make sure to decelerate during turning.
181
ABS Warning Light

turned to ON mode, ABS will
perform self-check; if ABS
04:02 20°C
warning light goes off after
0
km/h
illuminating for 3 seconds, it
I.F.C.
8.9 L/100km
Trip
259 km
999999 km
indicates that the system is
operating normally. If the light
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-4170 does not go off or comes on

during driving, it indicates that
the ABS is malfunctioning.
If ABS malfunctions, driver can still carry out conventional braking,
but brake force applied should be reduced as much as possible to
prevent wheel from locking. When warning light comes on, please
drive carefully and contact a Chery authorized service station
immediately for inspection and repair to avoid more malfunctions, or it
may cause accident.
WARNING
If ABS warning light and brake system warning light remain on simultaneously,
please immediately stop vehicle at a safe area and turn on the hazard lights,
then contact a Chery authorized service station to have the brake system
inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
182
4-8. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
ESP enhances directional control and stability control of the vehicle

under various driving conditions. ESP corrects under-steering or
over-steering of vehicle by applying brake to the appropriate wheels.
Engine power may also be reduced to help vehicle to maintain in the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in vehicle to determine path that driver intends to
steer and compares it with the actual path of vehicle. If actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP will apply brake to the
appropriate wheels to assist in counteracting the condition of over-
steering or under-steering.
ESP system has ABS, HBA, TCS and HHC functions.
4
ESP Warning Light

turned to ON mode, ESP
warning light will go off after
04:02 20°C
illuminating for 3 seconds.
0
I.F.C.
km/h
Trip
ESP warning light will flash when
ESP function is operating.
8.9 L/100km 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
rpm
OMT15-4130 If the light remains on, it

indicates that the system is
malfunctioning. For safety,
please contact a Chery
authorized service station for
inspection and repair.
183
WARNING
Excessive driving speed, sharp turning, road conditions, etc. may lead to
accidents during ESP operation. ESP function cannot ensure you break away
from losing control of your vehicle absolutely in limit conditions. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with ESP, take particular care when driving and abide by
all regulations to prevent accidents.
ESP OFF Switch
ESP OFF switch is located on

headlight adjusting control panel.
SET/-
RES/-
OFF When pressing ESP OFF switch,
ESP function will turn off and
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
ESP OFF indicator will come on.

OFF
To turn ESP on, press ESP OFF
switch again. At the same time,
OMT15-4180 ESP OFF indicator will go off.
CAUTION
To improve vehicle traction when driving on sand or gravel, it is recommended

to turn off the ESP function.
■ Situations unsuitable for ESP function:

When driving on deep snow or loose road surface
When driving with tire chains
184
Hill Hold Control System (HHC)
Hill Hold Control System (HHC) functions is that HCC will determine if
vehicle is driving on a slope using longitudinal acceleration sensor
after vehicle is stationary, and HHC will enter operating status
automatically when vehicle starts off forward (driving or reversing on
uphill). During starting off, after brake pedal is released by driver,
system will maintain the previous braking pressure for 1 to 2 seconds
to keep vehicle in a stationary condition, then braking pressure
decreases gradually as drive torque increases, thus avoiding rolling
backward during starting off on slope.
Hydraulic Brake Assist System (HBA)

4
Hydraulic Brake Assist System (HBA) function is an extension of ESP

system function. Usually, driver will apply brake in an emergency, but
the maximum braking force will not be applied, so braking distance
may become longer. In this case, brake assist system will operate:
HBA increases braking pressure to the maximum quickly when brake
pedal is depressed quickly by driver in an emergency without
sufficient depressing force applied, so as to shorten the braking
distance quickly and effectively by anti-lock brake system.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Traction Control System (TCS) is a skid control system that is used to

determine if drive wheels slip according to drive wheel speed and
driven wheel speed, and then suppress the drive speed when drive
speed is higher than the driven speed.
185
4-9. Hydraulic Power Steering System
Hydraulic power steering system makes vehicle steering operate

much lighter and easier.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to power steering system, do not keep steering wheel at limit
position for more than 5 seconds when engine is running.
Power Steering Fluid
Normal power steering fluid level

should be between "MIN" and
"MAX" lines. When power
steering fluid level is lower than
the "MIN" line, please add power
steering fluid immediately to a
proper level, and contact a Chery
OMT15-9903 authorized service station for
inspection and repair in time.
CAUTION
● If too much steering force is applied after engine is started, power steering
system may be malfunctioning. Please contact a Chery authorized service
station for inspection and repair in time.
● When engine is turned off, vehicle will lose steering assist. At this time, you
still can turn the steering wheel, however, it will require more effort.
186
4-10. Electric Power Steering System (EPS) (if equipped)
Electric Power Steering System (EPS) uses torque generated by

motor as power source of steering system other than power
generated by hydraulic pump driven by engine.

turned to ON mode, this warning
light will go off after illuminating
04:02 20°C
for 3 seconds. If the light does

0
not go off or comes on during
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km 259 km
C H P E
999999 km
F
x1000
driving, it indicates that the
rpm
system is malfunctioning.
OMT15-4450
4
WARNING

After EPS fails, please drive carefully even if your vehicle still has conventional
steering capability. At this time, please contact a Chery authorized service
station for inspection and repair as soon as possible.
When vehicle is parked with idling, never turn steering wheel left and
right rapidly and repeatedly to prevent system from overheating. If
system overheats, stop turning steering wheel, or stop vehicle and
turn engine (ignition) switch to ACC or OFF mode, until system cools
down.
CAUTION
Handling and turning steering wheel frequently for a long time will damage the
mechanical device in EPS.
187
4-11.Constant Speed Cruising
Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing

accelerator pedal.
Cruise control indicator

1
RES/+ button
SET/- button
ON/OFF button
3 SET/- RES/+
2
4 ON/OFF
OMT15-4210
Operating Procedure
1. With cruise system off, press ON/OFF button on steering wheel to

enter stand-by mode. Cruise control indicator will flash
continuously.
2. With vehicle speed between 40 km/h and 150 km/h, press SET/-
button on steering wheel to set current speed as cruise control
speed. The indicator will remain on.
CAUTION
If cruise control indicator still flashes, it indicates that vehicle does not enter
cruise control mode. Repeat above procedures and try to enter cruise control
mode. If vehicle still cannot enter cruise control mode after performing above
procedures, please contact a Chery authorized service station for inspection
and repair.
3. Press ON/OFF button on steering wheel again to exit cruise control

mode; at the same time, indicator will turn off.
188
Adjusting Set Speed
When vehicle is in cruise control mode, follow methods below to

change the set speed.
■ Fine adjustment
● Set speed will increase by 2 km/h each time the RES/+ is
pressed (standing time is less than 0.5 seconds).
● Set speed will decrease by 2 km/h each time the SET/- is
pressed (standing time is less than 0.5 seconds).
● The vehicle speed as the button is released is the set speed.
■ Large adjustment
4
● Press RES/+ button for more than 0.5 seconds to increase set
speed continuously.

● Press SET/- button for more than 0.5 seconds to decrease set
speed continuously.
● The vehicle speed as the button is released is the set speed.
WARNING
● Do not press and hold RES/+ button for an extended time to increase the set
speed. If so, the vehicle speed may increase continuously, resulting in a
potential safety hazard.
● Pressing and holding SET/- button for an extended time has equal effect of
coasting vehicle with accelerator pedal released, which does not have
braking performance. Therefore, if you want to apply brake, depress the
brake pedal.
189
■ Depress accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed. Release

the pedal and press SET/- button to cruise at current speed. If
the button is not pressed, vehicle will cruise at previous set
speed.
Canceling/Resuming Cruise Control
Cruise control will be canceled temporarily when brake pedal (for

CVT and DCT models) or clutch pedal (for MT model) is depressed
with vehicle in cruise control mode. Cruise control indicator on
instrument cluster will flash and vehicle will enter stand-by mode.
● If no operation is performed on cruise control buttons, vehicle will
remain in stand-by mode and driver can operate vehicle as normal
driving procedures.
● To resume cruise control, press RES/+ button. At this time, vehicle
will cruise at previous set speed. When long pressing RES/+
button, vehicle speed will continuously increase. The vehicle
speed as the button is released is the set speed. When pressing
SET/- button directly, vehicle will cruise at current speed.
CAUTION
● Resuming is available only when vehicle speed is between 40 km/h and 150
km/h.
● To avoid operating cruise control by mistake, turn cruise control off when not
in use.
190
Situations Unsuitable for Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so

may result in loss control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a
steep hill.
4
● During emergency towing
191
4-12. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if equipped)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is an active safety device,

which can monitor tire pressure and temperature in real time and
display the values on instrument cluster. When tire pressure is too
low or temperature is too high, tire pressure monitoring system will
sound a warning.
TPMS Display
Press adjustment button on

steering wheel to adjust
19:25 ECO 11.0°C
2.3 11.1 1.6 11.1 instrument cluster screen to tire

bar °C bar °C
pressure temperature display
2.3
bar
11.1
°C
2.3
bar
11.1
°C
screen (refer to "Switching
5185 km
Display Item" in Instrument
C H P E F Panel section for details).
OMT15-4227
When vehicle driving speed is
more than 30 km/h for a period
of time, values for tire pressure
and temperature will be
displayed on instrument cluster
in real time; when display
conditions are not as specified,
they will be displayed as "--".
192
System Malfunction Warning
When vehicle speed is more

than 30 km/h, if tire pressure
04:02 20.5°C
monitoring system still has not

received radio-frequency signal
1.F.C.
Please Check
The tire pressure monitoring system
Trip from one or more sensors after
8.8 L/100km 9 km
999999 km
10 minutes, TPMS will send
C H D E F system malfunction warning.
OMT15-4470 Warning light remains on after
flashing for 75 seconds, and
"Please Check The tire pressure
monitoring system" message will 4
disappear after displaying for 5

seconds, but it can be found
from query interface.
CAUTION
Causes for system malfunction warning

● Tire pressure monitoring system may be affected, because sensor is
influenced by electromagnetic shielding characteristic with tire chain
installed.
● Tire pressure monitoring system may not operate due to radio interference.
Tire pressure monitoring system may be interfered temporarily due to strong
electromagnetic radio signals with same frequency (433 MHZ).
● Learning for configuration of tire pressure monitoring system are not
performed after replacing wheels (spare tire included).
Tire pressure monitoring system is performing learning for configuration, and
has not reached the condition that vehicle speed is more than 30 km/h for a
period of time.
● Tire pressure sensor or other components have been damaged. Please
contact the Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair as
necessary.
193
Low Pressure Warning
When vehicle tire pressure is

lower than 1.8 bar, system will
19:25 ECO 11.0°C
2.3 11.1 1.6 11.1 send a low pressure warning as

bar °C bar °C
driving speed is more than 30
2.3
bar
11.1
°C
2.3
bar
11.1
°C
km/h for a period of time.
5185 km When low pressure warning
C H P E F
occurs, corresponding wheel
OMT15-4227
sign will flash, current pressure
value will be displayed and tire
pressure warning light will come
on.
When tire pressure is too low, please inflate tire to 2.3 bar as soon as
possible. When driving speed is more than 30 km/h for a period of
time, low pressure warning will release automatically.
CAUTION
● Low tire pressure will increase fuel consumption and cause further tire wear.
Serious tire wear may cause a risk of tire blowout.
● When tire pressure is too low, please inspect causes of air leakage. Please
contact the Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair as
necessary.
194
High Temperature Warning
When temperature of one or more tires is higher than 85°C, system

will send a high temperature warning as driving speed is more than
30 km/h for a period of time.
When high temperature warning

occurs, wheel sign will flash,
19:25 ECO 11.0°C
2.3 88.5 2.3 87.3 current temperature value will be

bar °C bar °C
displayed and tire pressure
2.3
bar
92.6
°C
2.3
bar
89.2
°C
warning light will remain on.
5185 km When high temperature warning
C H P E F
occurs, stop vehicle and cool
OMT15-4228 4
down the tire naturally, or it may
cause accidents.

When driving speed is more than 30 km/h for a period of time and tire
temperature is lower than 80°C, high temperature warning will
release automatically.
CAUTION
● Tire temperature value displayed on instrument cluster defaults to °C, but

also may be °F. Perform selection according to adjustment buttons in
instrument cluster screen on steering wheel.
● When tire temperature is too high, do not cool it down with cold water, which
will cause tire damage, resulting in accidents. Please contact the Chery
authorized service station for inspection and repair as necessary.
195
4-13.Parking Sensor Assistant System (PAS)
Parking Sensor Assistant System (PAS) consists of radar sensors (4

sensors or 8 sensors (depends on different configuration)), camera
(if equipped), controller and warning device, etc.
Parking Sensor Assistant System (4-sensor)

in ON mode, parking sensor
assistant system starts to
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/- operate after vehicle is switched
VOL
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
to reverse; multi-information
display in instrument cluster will
display corresponding distance
information and buzzer will
sound when obstacles are
detected by radar sensors.
OMT15-4215
196
System Information Display (4-sensor)

Multi-information display in instrument cluster will display
corresponding distance information and buzzer will sound when
obstacles are detected by radar sensors.
Display Methods on Instrument Cluster

Distance/cm Rear Left Rear Right
Rear Left Rear Right Note
Middle Middle
Sound
≤ 35 continuously
40 ≤ L ≤ 60 Sound at 4 Hz
65 ≤ L ≤ 90 - - Sound at 2 Hz
4
95 ≤ L ≤ 150 - - Sound at 1 Hz

Malfunction Warning Display (4-sensor)
Display
Malfunctioning Methods on
Sound Prompt Note
Sensor Instrument
Cluster
Malfunction message:
Sound continuously
Rear left sensor "Check Rear Left Side
for 2 seconds
Radar Sensor"
Rear left middle Sound continuously
"Check Left Middle Side
sensor for 2 seconds
Radar Sensor"
Rear right middle Sound continuously
"Check Right Middle
Side Radar Sensor"
Sound continuously
Rear right sensor "Check Rear Right Side
for 2 seconds
Radar Sensor"
197
CAUTION
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode and shift lever is shift to

reverse, instrument cluster switches to small car screen; if obstacle
information is not detected by system (obstacle distance is more than 150
cm), only small car is displayed, with arc not displayed.
● For low-equipped model, it is only equipped with 4 rear radar sensors
without camera and PAS switch; only reversing distance and warning
information are displayed on instrument cluster.
● When more sensors are malfunctioning, malfunction information of each
sensor will be displayed circularly by messages in order shown in table
above, each item displays for 5 seconds and sound warning is handled
according to signals sent from radar module.
Parking Sensor Assistant System (8-sensor) (if equipped)

in ON mode, parking sensor
assistant system can be turned
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/- on by PAS switch or reverse
VOL
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
switch; multi-information display
in instrument cluster will display
corresponding distance
information and buzzer will
sound when obstacles are
detected by radar sensors.
not in ON mode, PAS turns off
automatically.
OMT15-4224
198
PAS Switch

in ON mode, touch PAS switch to
activate PAS. If system is normal
when PAS is activated each
time, warning sounds for 0.5
3
2 OFF
AVM
second, PAS indicator comes on

and system starts to measure
OMT15-4233 the distance. If system is
malfunctioning, warning will
sound continuously for 2
seconds, then malfunction 4
information will display until

malfunction is released.
If vehicle is in forward and PAS has activated, front and rear sensors
of PAS stop working when vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h; PAS
will not resume working when vehicle speed decreases to below 15
km/h. At this time, turn on/off PAS by touching PAS switch.
CAUTION
● Parking sensor assistant system cannot take the place of driver to judge
outside conditions, so driver needs to perform some operations carefully,
such as parking and other similar operations.
● After activating PAS by reverse switch (whether PAS switch is turned on or
not before shifting to reverse), parking sensor assistant system still operates
after shifting to other gears.
199
System Information Display (8-sensor)

Multi-information display in instrument cluster will display
corresponding distance information and buzzer will sound when
obstacles are detected by radar sensors.
Display Methods on Instrument Cluster

Distance/cm Front Left Front Right
Front Left Front Right Note
Middle Middle
Sound
≤ 35 continuously
40 ≤ L ≤ 60 Sound at 4 Hz
65 ≤ L ≤ 90 - - Sound at 2 Hz
Malfunction Warning Display (8-sensor)
Display
Malfunctioning Methods on
Sound Prompt Note
Sensor Instrument
Cluster
Sound continuously
Front left sensor "Check Front Left Side
for 2 seconds
Radar Sensor"
Front left middle Sound continuously
"Check Front Left
Middle Radar Sensor"
Front right middle Sound continuously
"Check Front Right
Middle Radar Sensor"
Sound continuously
Front right sensor "Check Front Right
for 2 seconds
Radar Sensor"
For more details of rear sensors, refer to "Parking Sensor Assistant

System (4-sensor)" in this section.
200
Instructions for Use
● Monitoring distance is the shortest vertical distance between

obstacle and ultrasonic sensor.
● Maximum monitoring distance: farthest standard distance between
obstacle detected and ultrasonic sensor is 150 cm.
Pay attention to following conditions. Buzzer may not sound even if
radar sensor is close to obstacle:
Radar sensors cannot detect thin
objects such as wires, fences
and ropes, etc.

OMT15-4230
Radar sensors cannot detect low

objects such as rocks, etc.
OMT15-4240
Radar sensors may not detect

objects that are higher than bum-
per.
OMT15-4250
201
Radar sensors cannot detect

objects that easily absorb ultra-
sonic waves such as soft snow,
cotton, sponge, etc.
OMT15-4260
When surface of radar sensor is

frozen, sensor will not detect any
obstacle.
OMT15-4270
When radar sensors are covered

by dirt, snow or mud, they may
not detect obstacles.
OMT15-4280
Radar sensors only detect the

nearest obstacle.
OMT15-4290
202
CAUTION
For obstacles out of the detection range, radar sensors do not give a warning.
When several obstacles are detected simultaneously, warning sounds accord-
ing to nearest obstacle. Please note that, when the vehicle is moving, the ultra-
sonic sensors on the other side of vehicle may approach other obstacles.
When reversing in following conditions, reverse radar sensors may

provide wrong information:
When the vehicle is on a steep
slope.

OMT15-4300
When using the high-frequency

radio or antenna equipped on
the vehicle.
OMT15-4310
The noise around vehicle is loud

due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehi-
cles, or other loud noises produc-
ing ultrasonic waves.
OMT15-4320
203
When driving in the jelly-like

snow or in the rain.
OMT15-4330
If the buzzer does not sound when reversing, please check the
followings:
1. If there is foreign matter on the surface of radar sensor;
2. If the surface of radar sensor is frozen;
3. If the vehicle has been parked for a long time in either hot or cold
weather;
If causes cannot be found, please contact the Chery authorized
service station for inspection and repair.
Cleaning Parking Sensor
The surface of reversing radar sensor which is covered with snow or

mud can be cleaned with soft cloth or water (low-pressure water)
when cleaning vehicle.
CAUTION
High pressure water, from water gun,
etc., or great external force can cause
damage to the radar sensors. Do not
pinch or impact the radar sensors, or it
may be resulting in abnormal operation.
OMT15-4340
204
4-14. Panoramic View Monitor System (if equipped)
Panoramic view monitor system consists of one controller, 4 wide-

angle cameras and video transmission line, etc. It combines aerial
view of vehicle surroundings by collecting images from front, rear,
left and right directions and using image processing algorithm, and
then displays the view through touch display of audio head unit.
Panoramic view monitor system has surrounding and one-sided
view, three-dimensional surrounding roaming, three-dimensional
left/right side view, dynamic/static reverse track.
Camera Distribution
Front camera installation 4

position: intake grille on the front
of vehicle

OMT15-4236
Left/Right camera installation

position: bottom of left/right
outside rear view mirror
OMT15-4235
205
Rear camera installation

position: center part above rear
license plate
OMT15-4222
Turning On and Off Panoramic View Monitor System
● When engine (ignition) switch

is in ON mode and vehicle
speed is lower than 20 km/h,
click " AVM " switch to enter
3
panoramic view monitor

2 OFF
AVM
system.
OMT15-4234
● When engine (ignition) switch
is in ON mode and vehicle
speed is lower than 20 km/h,
shift to reverse to enter
panoramic view monitor
system immediately.
● If vehicle speed is more than 30 km/h, system will exit panoramic
view monitor system immediately. For driving safety, vehicle speed
needs to decrease to below 20 km/h if it needs to enter panoramic
view monitor system again.
● Vehicle exits panoramic view monitor system after 5 seconds when
shifting to reverse.
Screen switches to corresponding view within 5 seconds when
user clicks front, rear, left, right areas of panoramic mosaic and
one-sided view, and each operation will count 5 seconds again. If
no operation is performed by user after 5 seconds, vehicle exits the
panoramic view monitor system.
206
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode and vehicle speed is

lower than 20 km/h, turn on left/right turn signal switch to enter
three-dimensional left/right side view screen automatically, and the
vehicle exits the panoramic mode after turning off turn signal light.
For detailed operations, refer to "Vehicle Settings" in section 5.
● When engine (ignition) switch is not in ON mode, vehicle exits the
panoramic view monitor system immediately.
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode, if the vehicle enters
panoramic view monitor system with gear in other than R, AVM
switch will turn off and it will exit the system.
CAUTION
Panoramic view monitor system provides assistance for driving, but objects in 4
the image do not indicate the actual size and object distance, and the image
has a little delays and blind spot relative to actual condition, so surrounding

function cannot take place of driver's operation and judgment. Driver should
pay attention to the surroundings and safety driving when turning on, off and
using of functions.
Switching One-sided and Surrounding View
After entering panoramic screen,

Mind surroundings
touch front/rear/left/right area of
car model on right side (areas on
dashed boxes), then displaying
area on left view switches to
image taken by front/rear/left/
right camera respectively.
OMT15-4239
The direction of one-sided view
is indicated by highlight.
207
CAUTION
Panoramic view monitor system is very helpful for parking and safety driving. It
is recommended that you should be familiar with this function in wide and con-
venient place in advance.
Three-dimensional Surrounding Roaming
After engine starts, vehicle will

enter three-dimensional
surrounding roaming screen
when entering panoramic view
monitor system at the first time,
then enter the panoramic view
monitor system screen. During
OMT15-4238 three-dimensional surrounding
roaming, you also can touch
display to enter panoramic view
monitor system screen in
advance.
Three-dimensional Left/Right Side View

Mind surroundings in ON mode and vehicle speed is
lower than 20 km/h, turn on left/
right turn signal switch to enter
three-dimensional left/right side
view screen automatically, and
the vehicle exits the panoramic
OMT15-4500 mode after turning off turn signal
light.
208
Static/Dynamic Reverse Guideline
Static track line

Mind surroundings
After entering surrounding and rear
view screen by shifting to reverse
gear, static/dynamic reverse
guideline and local view of rear
area will be displayed on rear view
image.
OMT15-4501
Definition of static reverse guideline:

Red indicates about 0.5 m away from bumper; 4
Yellow indicates about 1 m away from bumper;

Green at near end indicates about 2 m away from bumper;
Green at far end indicates about 3 m away from bumper.
Dynamic track line

Mind surroundings
Dynamic track line is used for pre-
judging the vehicle travelling trace,
which varies depending on wheel
rotation.
OMT15-4502
WARNING
● Camera lens may enlarge and distort the view, so image on display is
different from real object or it cannot reflect the real object accurately, and
there is also blind spot and a little delay.
● When reversing, always pay extra attention to surrounding children, small
animals and objects, because they cannot always be detected by camera.
● Never distract your attention from surrounding traffic due to images on
display.
209
Local View of Rear Area
System receives obstacle

Mind surroundings information from reverse radar
controller, then enters local view of
rear area when distance detected
by reverse radar between obstacle
behind vehicle and vehicle body is
less than 0.9 m.
OMT15-4503
CAUTION
Reverse radar is abnormal or dose not operate, which will affect normal
detection for distance by radar.
210
4-15.Operation Safety Precautions
It is better to do a safety check before driving vehicle. A few minutes

of checking can help to ensure safe and pleasant driving.
WARNING
If you perform this check in garage, ensure good ventilation.
Before Starting Engine
■ Outside vehicle
1. Tires (including spare tire). Check the pressure with a gauge and
4
carefully check tires for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
2. Wheel bolts. Confirm that wheel bolts are not lost or loose.

3. Fluid leakage. After the vehicle has been parked for a short time,
check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid (water
dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal).
4. Lights. Make sure the headlights, daytime running lights, stop
lights, fog lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working
properly.
5. Intake grille. Remove snow,
leaves or other obstructions
from intake grille in front of
the windshield.
OMT15-4410
211
■ Inside vehicle
1. Spare tools. Make sure you have spare tools (such as jack and
wheel bolt wrench, etc.) and spare tire.
2. Seat belts. Check if the buckles are locked securely. Make sure
the belts are not worn or frayed.
3. Instrument cluster and controls. Especially make sure the
warning lights, indicator lights, and controls are working
properly.
4. Brakes. Make sure the pedal has enough free play.
■ Engine compartment and engine
1. Spare fuses. Confirm that there are spare fuses. All specified
fuses on fuse box should be prepared.
2. Coolant level. Make sure the coolant level is proper (please refer
to "Checking Coolant Level" in section 8).
3. Battery and cables. Check for corroded or loose terminals and a
cracked case. Check the cables for good condition and
connections.
4. Wiring. Look for damaged, loose or broken wires.
5. Fuel lines. Check the lines for leaks or loose connections.
■ Hood
Before driving, confirm that hood has been locked completely, or it
may tilt and block the front view when driving, resulting in
accidents.
After Starting Engine
1. Exhaust system. Listen for any leakage. Repair any leaks

immediately if such condition occurs (refer to "Exhaust Gas" in this
section).
2. Engine oil level. Stop the vehicle on the level ground, and pull out
the dipstick to check if the engine oil level is proper after engine is
stopped for 5 minutes (please refer to "Checking Engine Oil Level"
in section 8).
212
When Driving
1. Gauges and meters. Make sure all the gauges and meters are
working properly.
2. Brakes. Check that the vehicle does not pull to one side when the
brakes are applied in a safe place.
3. Other abnormal conditions. Check for loose parts, oil leakage and
abnormal noises.
Operations for Parking
Proper parking is an important part of safety driving, park the vehicle

in a place with wide road, good view without affecting traffic.
4
Operation order for parking is as follow:
1. Depress the brake pedal until vehicle stops completely.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever.
3. For CVT and DCT models:
Move shift lever to P position.
For MT model:
Move shift lever to N position.
4. Turn engine (ignition) switch to OFF mode.
CAUTION
When leaving vehicle, confirm that vehicle has been locked and key is carried
with you.
213
Parking on Slope
Parking vehicle on a slope is mainly by brake force of parking brake.

There are lots of examples that vehicle slides along slope as parking
brake lever is not pulled up firmly or failure to apply parking brake,
resulting in person injury and traffic collision. When parking on a
slope, it is better to face tires toward one side of vehicle, to prevent
vehicle from moving accidentally.
■ Parallel parking on downhill
Move shift lever to reverse after
parking (for manual
transmission). If there is curb on
roadside, turn steering wheel
right by a certain angle to make
front part of front right wheel
close to or against the curb, to
OMT15-4360 prevent vehicle from sliding
forward along the slope. Then
apply the parking brake.
■ Parking on uphill
Move shift lever to 1st gear after
parking (for manual
transmission). If there is curb on
roadside, turn steering wheel left
by a certain angle to make rear
part of front right wheel close to
or against the curb, to prevent
OMT15-4380 vehicle form sliding backward
along the slope. Then apply the
parking brake.
214
■ Parking on uphill or downhill (without curb)

If there is no curb on roadside,
turn steering wheel right by a
large angle, to prevent vehicle
from driving into center of road
after sliding forward/backward
along the slope. Turn steering
wheel to side of road so that
OMT15-4370 vehicle is far away from center of
road when moving. Then apply
the parking brake.
Carrying Passengers 4

WARNING
● Never allow anyone to sit in the luggage compartment when carrying

passengers. Doing so is very dangerous for the passengers, as they are
likely to be seriously injured during the collision.
● Do not let the passengers sit in the places where there are no seats and seat
belts.
● Before driving, make sure all the passengers sit in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened.
Locking Vehicle
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle unattended, carry key with you and lock all the
doors, even if you are parking the vehicle in the garage or on the sidewalk in
front of your house. Park the vehicle in bright and spacious places as much as
possible, and do not expose valuable items.
215
Exhaust Gas
WARNING
● Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust gas. It contains carbon monoxide (CO),
which is harmful, colorless and odorless, and can cause unconsciousness or
even death after inhaling.
● Make sure the exhaust system has no leakage holes or loose connections.
The exhaust system should be checked usually. If a change in exhaust gas
sound is found, please have the system checked immediately.
● Do not run the engine in a garage or an enclosed area except when driving
the vehicle in or out the garge. The exhaust gas cannot diffuse out, which
may cause serious injury.
● Do not stay in a parked vehicle for a long time with the engine running. If it is
unavoidable, the vehicle should be parked in a spacious area and adjust the
heating or cooling system to force the outside air into the vehicle.
● Keep the back door closed while driving. An open or unclosed back door
may cause exhaust gas to enter into the vehicle.
● To ensure proper operation of your vehicle's ventilation system, keep the
intake grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.
● If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, open the windows to make a mass
of fresh air come in and check the vehicle conditions simultaneously.
Checking Exhaust System
The exhaust system should be checked in following situations:

1. When you smell the exhaust fumes.
2. When you notice a change in the sound of exhaust system.
3. When exhaust system is damaged due to vehicle collision.
4. When lifting the vehicle for inspection and repair.
216
4-16.Off-road Driving Precautions
WARNING
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Be careful when driving off the road. Do not drive in dangerous areas.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off the road. A bad bump
could jerk the steering wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands on the
outer ring.
● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
shallow water, snow, or on road covered with sand, mud.
● After driving on the road surface covered with tall grass, mud, gravel, sand,
rivers, etc., check if there is grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc.
adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any above matters from
the underbody. If driving vehicle with those matters trapped on or adhering to 4
the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● The driver and all the passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever
the vehicle is moving.
● When driving off the road or on the rugged terrain, high speed driving,
jumping, sharp turning and striking objects, etc. are forbidden. Failure to do
so may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover, resulting in death or severe
personnel injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's
suspension and chassis.
217
4-17.Driving in the Rain
When Driving on Slippery Road Surfaces
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced,

the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will
be slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the
rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and
the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from
operating properly.
CAUTION
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering on a slippery surface may cause

tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in
accidents.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as sudden engine braking, may
cause vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress brake pedal to make sure
brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake linings may prevent brakes from
functioning properly. If brake lining on one side is wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
218
Driving Through Water
The vehicle could be seriously

damaged when driving on a
road that has flooded after
heavy rain. If driving through
water is unavoidable, check
the depth of water and drive
slowly and carefully.
OMT15-4350
1. When you are driving through water, make sure that the engine
runs properly and that the steering and braking system work
normally. When driving smoothly through water, you should switch 4
to low gear and avoid a sudden depression of the accelerator

pedal or a rush driving. Doing so may prevent water from splashing
into the engine.
2. Depressing and holding the accelerator pedal while driving, make
sure the vehicle has adequate and stable power. You should drive
through without half-way stopping, gear shifting or sharp turning.
3. If the vehicle stalls in water, never restart it immediately to prevent
further damage to the engine. The vehicle should be towed to a
safe place where the water is shallow to find out the cause.
219
CAUTION
● Never drive through water that is deeper than the bottom of wheel rim.
● Water intrusion into the engine may cause engine stall or serious internal
damage.
● Water can wash the grease from the wheel bearing, causing rusting and
premature abrasion.
● Driving through water may cause damage to vehicle's drive train
components. Always visually inspect your vehicle's fluids (e.g. engine oil,
transmission oil, etc.) for signs of leakage after driving through water. Do not
continue to operate vehicle if any fluid leaks, as this may result in further
damage.
● Vehicle traction and braking performance will decrease while driving through
water. The braking distance will increase. Sand and mud that has
accumulated around the brake discs may affect the braking efficiency and
may damage the brake system components. After driving through water,
slightly depress the brake pedal for several times to dry the brakes off.
220
4-18.Winter Driving
Winter Driving Tips
Coolant. Make sure that coolant has real anti-freezing function. Only
use coolant recommended by Chery. Please refer to "Checking Coolant
Level" in section 8 for details about coolant type selection.
CAUTION
Do not use water as a substitute for coolant.
Battery and cables. Low temperature will decrease power of any

battery. Sufficient power should be stored in battery for starting in
winter.
Oil. In winter, if a large amount of summer oil remains in engine, it 4
may be difficult to start. Please contact Chery authorized service

station, if you cannot confirm which kind of oil should be used.
Door locks. Avoid door locks being frozen. Deicing agent or
glycerine should be sprayed into door lock holes.
Washer fluid. Use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is
available at Chery authorized service stations and most vehicle
component distributors. The mixture ratio of washer fluid and water
should follow manufacturer's instruction.
CAUTION
Do not use engine coolant or other alternatives, otherwise vehicle paint will be
damaged.
221
Brakes. Do not use parking brake if it could be frozen, otherwise

parking brake will be frozen by snow or water, resulting in parking
brake difficult to be released. When parking, move shift lever to P
gear (for CVT and DCT models), or R gear or 1st gear (for MT model)
and put a vehicle stopper in front of, or behind wheels to prevent
vehicle from moving.
Mudguards. Avoid ice and snow accumulation under mudguards.
Failure to do so may cause difficult steering. When driving in cold
weather, you should often stop vehicle to check for ice and snow
accumulation under mudguards. It is recommended that you should
take some necessary emergency items with you depending on
different driving destinations. Items that need to be put in vehicle: tire
chains, window snow scraper, sand or salt bag, signal flasher, shovel,
jumper cable, etc.
Driving on Road Covered with Ice and Snow
Rapid acceleration on slippery

road surfaces, such as snow or
ice covered roads, may cause the
rear wheels slipping to right or
left. Therefore, please drive at low
speed and operate carefully.
OMT15-4390
It is possible to build up a layer of water film between tire and road

surface when driving on wet or muddy roads. This may prevent the
steering and braking from operating properly. To reduce the torque
and avoid slipping, you can use 2nd gear when starting off on road
surface covered with ice and snow. It is recommended that you
enable ESP function on this occasion.
222
Tire Chains
Purchase a set of tire chains that match size of the vehicle tires. Pay
attention to following precautions when installing and removing
chains:
1. Follow local regulations when using tire chains.
2. Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
3. Install tire chains by following the instructions provided with the tire
chains.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do

so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause 4
death or serious injury.

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and
type of road. Always check local regulations before installing tire chains.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden steering and sudden braking that may affect control ability of
vehicle with tire chains installed.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control
is maintained.
223
4-19.How to Save Fuel and Extend Life of Vehicle
Saving fuel is largely determined by vehicle conditions and driving

habit. Do not overuse the vehicle, which also helps to extend
vehicle's life.
The followings are some specific tips for fuel saving:

1. Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Insufficient tire
inflation pressure will lead to tire wear and fuel waste. (Please refer
to MAINTENANCE - Do-it-yourself maintenance - Checking Tire
Inflation Pressure).
2. The vehicle should not be loaded with unnecessary weight. Heavy
load increases engine load, resulting in high fuel consumption.
3. Avoid warm-up idling for a long time. The vehicle can be driven
once the engine runs smoothly. Note that driving should be steady.
Please remember that the warm-up time in cold winter will be
longer than other seasons.
4. Accelerate slowly and smoothly, avoiding sudden starting.
5. Avoid engine idling for a long time. If you need to park vehicle and
wait for a long time, you should turn off the engine and turn it on
again later.
6. Avoid engine out of gear or overspeed. Select proper gears
according to driving road conditions.
7. Avoid continuous acceleration and deceleration. Stop-and-go
driving will waste the fuel.
8. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. You should keep a stable
speed. Driving following the traffic lights can minimize parking
times, or take full advantage of road without traffic lights to drive
vehicle. Keep proper driving distance with other vehicles, to avoid
sudden braking. It will also reduce brake wear.
9. Avoid areas with heavy traffic or traffic jams as much as you can.
10. Do not hold your foot on clutch or brake pedal. This will cause
premature wear, overheating and high fuel consumption.
224
11. Keep a proper vehicle speed on the highway. The faster vehicle
speed increases, the higher fuel consumption is. Decreasing
vehicle speed will save fuel.
12. Keep the proper front wheel alignment. Avoid collision with road
curbs and reduce your vehicle speed when driving on rough road
surfaces. Improper front wheel alignment will not only quicken tire
wear, but also increase engine load.
13. Avoid vehicle chassis contacting with mud, etc. This will not only
reduce vehicle weight, but also prevent corrosion.
14. Adjust vehicle and keep it in optimal working condition. Dirty air
filter, improper valve clearance, dirty spark plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes without adjusted properly, etc. can reduce engine
performance and waste fuel. You must perform maintenance 4
periodically if you want to extend your vehicle's life and reduce

your driving costs. Your vehicle needs to be serviced more
frequently if always driving under severe conditions.
CAUTION
Never turn off engine when driving downhill. The power steering and brake
booster will not operate when engine is not running.
225
226
Section 5
FEATURES OF
YOUR VEHICLE
5-1. Audio System ................... 230 A/C Switch ........................ 289

Audio Control Panel.......... 230 Outside/Recirculated Air
FM .................................... 236 Mode Switch ................. 290
Multimedia ........................ 238 Air Outlets Airflow
Control .......................... 291
Communication................. 247
Electric Air Conditioning
Cloudrive System .......................... 294
Interconnection ............. 253
Electric Air Conditioning
Cloudrive Interconnection Control Interface on
Operating Method ......... 258 Audio Head Unit............ 294
Common Questions of Air Conditioning Interface
Cloudrive Display Button............... 295
Interconnection ............. 264
Front Defrosting Button..... 296
Supported File Formats .... 265
OFF Switch ....................... 297
System Setting ................. 269
Air Volume Adjustment
Steering Wheel Quick Knob.............................. 298
Buttons.......................... 276
Temperature Adjustment
Knob.............................. 299
5-2. Air Conditioning System ... 277
Mode Switch ..................... 299
Automatic Air
A/C Switch ........................ 300
Conditioning System
(if equipped) .................. 277 Outside/Recirculated Air
Mode Button.................. 300
AUTO Switch .................... 279
Precautions When
Air Conditioning Interface
Using Air Conditioning
Display Button............... 281
System .......................... 301
Front Defrosting Button .... 282
OFF Switch ....................... 283 5-3. Rear Window and Outside
DUAL Switch .................... 283 Rear View Mirror
Left/Right Temperature Defogger ....................... 302
Adjustment Knob .......... 284
Blower Governer Switch ... 286
5-4. Rear View Mirror............... 303
Mode Switch ..................... 286
227
Inside Rear View Mirror .... 303 Interior Lights .................... 328
Power Outside Rear Front Doorsill Light
View Mirror.................... 304 (if equipped) .................. 329
Courtesy Light
5-5. Wipers and Washer (if equipped) .................. 329
System .......................... 307 Luggage Compartment
Front Wipers Operation Light .............................. 330
Instructions ................... 307
Front Washers Operation 5-9. Power Outlet ..................... 331
Instructions ................... 309
Rear Wiper Operation 5-10. Cigarette Lighter and
Instructions ................... 310 Ashtray .......................... 332
Rear Washer Operation
Instructions ................... 310 5-11. Cup Holders...................... 334
5-6. Seats ................................ 312 5-12. Sun Visors and Vanity

Front Seats ....................... 312 Mirrors ........................... 335
Rear Seats........................ 315
Head Restraints ................ 316 5-13. Assist Grips and Rear
Center Armrest .............. 336
5-7. Seat Heater
(if equipped) .................. 318 5-14. Panoramic Moon Roof
(if equipped) .................. 337
5-8. Lights ................................ 320
Headlight Combination 5-15. Storage Space .................. 341
Switch ........................... 320 Glove Box ......................... 341
Turn signal lights .............. 324 Center Console Storage
Daytime Running Lights ... 325 Box................................ 341
Fog Lights ......................... 325 Storage Box (without Seat
Headlight Leveling ............ 327 Heating) ........................ 342
228
Storage Box Tray.............. 342
Card Slots ......................... 342
Door Storage Boxes ......... 343
Seat Storage Bag ............. 344
Glasses Box ..................... 344
Ticket Holder .................... 344
Luggage Compartment..... 345
Luggage Compartment
Storage Boxes .............. 346
Roof Carrier
(if equipped) .................. 346
Fixing hook ....................... 346
Luggage Stowage
Precautions ................... 348
229
Section 5. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5-1. Audio System
Audio Control Panel
FM87.50
MHz
Media Phone
1
Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System
L0 L0 1 2
2
7 3
6 4
5
OMT15-5000
Touch screen ● Turn on/off audio system

Cloudrive Interconnection ● Rotate clockwise to increase
button the volume; rotate
● Switch to Cloudrive counterclockwise to decrease
Interconnection screen the volume
Bluetooth telephone button Main menu button
SET button ● Switch to main menu screen
Power button/volume
adjustment knob
230
■ Main menu screen
1 2 3
FM87.50
MHz
Navi Media Phone
Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System
L0 L0 1 2
12 11 10 9 7 8 7 6 5 4 4
5
OMT15-5001
FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Radio ● If phone is dark, the phone is
Multimedia disconnected from vehicle
● Touch this area to enter audio system.
multimedia menu screen. Air conditioning temperature
Communication display
● Touch this area to enter ● Current air conditioning
communication screen. temperature setting is
USB connection status displayed.
● If USB is highlighted, it is Vehicle information
connected to vehicle audio ● Touch this area to display
system successfully; vehicle information.
● If USB is dark, USB is Circulation mode
disconnected from vehicle ● Current circulation mode is
audio system currently. displayed.
Bluetooth connection status Air flow mode
● If Bluetooth is highlighted, the ● Current air flow mode is
phone is connected to vehicle displayed.
audio system Bluetooth Air speed
successfully; ● Current high/low air speed of
● If Bluetooth is dark, the phone air conditioning is displayed.
is disconnected from vehicle Main menu button
audio system Bluetooth. ● When it is not in main menu
Phone connection status screen, touch it to return to
● If phone is highlighted, the main menu screen.
phone is connected to vehicle
audio system successfully;
231
■ Power on screen
Power button is integrated with
volume adjustment button, and
they are located in central
position of air conditioning
control panel.
● With engine (ignition) switch in
ON/ACC mode, press power
OMT15-5091
button to turn on audio
system. At this time, Chery
automobile logo will appear,
and then it enters main menu
screen.
● When audio system is

powered on, press power
Outside 14.0°
button to turn it off. At this
time, only vehicle body and
outside temperature are
displayed on the screen.
OMT15-5093
Volume adjustment knob

● Rotate clockwise to increase the
volume; rotate counterclockwise
to decrease the volume.
OMT15-5092
232
■ Main menu screen
Operating method to enter main

menu screen
● If main menu is hidden, touch
FM87.50
MHz
Media Phone
Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System " " button to display main
menu screen.
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5002
The main menu screen consists of 5 sub menus for selection:

multimedia, communication, Cloudrive Interconnection, setting and
radio.
233
CAUTION
● When operate audio system with engine (ignition) switch off, audio system
will turn off automatically after working for 30 minutes. If continues to use,
turn it on again, but it will turn off again after re-timing for 30 minutes.
● Press and hold power button for 10 seconds to reset and restart the head
unit. In case of malfunctions such as abnormal operations etc., try to press
and hold reset and restart function.
● Pictures listed in the manual are schematic diagrams, individual screens of
actual product may be different; as a smart audio product, software updating
may cause some content change.
● Audio head unit can support various common types of Bluetooth phones.
But it may have poor compatibility with some Bluetooth phones due to phone
differences.
● Reading and playing speed of the audio head unit is determined by the
directory structure of sound source. If the inserted USB device or SD card
has complicated directory structure, reading and playing time may be longer.
● This product does not support video files with high resolution and big bit-
stream, and due to picture quality or other reasons, some video files may not
be displayed perfectly; in case the video is non-supported or sluggishly
displayed, please convert it into a low resolution video with a video
transcoder, or use other video sources.
● Video files with copyright protection are not supported by this product. If
playing such video files leads to disputes, Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
assumes no responsibility.
● Audio formats such as MP3, wma, wav, aac, ogg, etc. are supported.
● Video formats such as avi, .mp4, .wmv, .asf, .dat, .mpg, .mov, mpeg-4, .vob,
.mkv, etc. are supported; JPG and BMP picture formats are supported.
234
■ Vehicle information
With engine (ignition) switch in ON mode, touch " " on main
menu to enter vehicle information screen.
● Operate " " to turn on or

Shayne W...
off certain vehicle functions.
Suspended
Please refer to "Vehicle
BSD Setting" in this chapter for
Fuel Shortage
Add oil ASAP
DRL
details.
Rear Camera
● When oil level is too low, " "

on vehicle information screen
Press SET key to set more
OMT15-5003
will illuminate.
● Display a prompt message

Shayne W...
as "High Temp" when the tire
Suspended
temperature is too high. 5
● Display a prompt message

BSD

2.2 bar 2.2 bar
Low Pressure 16 C 16 C DRL
Inflate ASAP
Rear Camera
as "Low pressure" when the
1.8 bar
14 C
2.1 bar
14 C tire pressure is too low.
Press SET key to set more
OMT15-5004 ● Touch " " button to return to

main screen.
235
FM
Operating method to enter radio

screen
FM87.50
● Touch [FM] on main menu to
MHz
Navi Media Phone enter radio screen.

Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5005
■ Radio
● Band selection: Touch "FM/

FM AM AM" on radio screen to select
FM or AM band.
96.5 MHz
88 92 96 100 104 108
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5006
● Automatic search: Touch " " or " " to automatically search

and play low frequency radio station.
● Manual search: Touch " " or " " to adjust to previous or
next radio station manually.
● Touch " " to store current radio station.
● Touch " " to turn on or off the radio.
● Slide area " 88 92 96 100 104 108 " to switch radio stations.
● Touch " " to enter sound effect setting screen.
Sound effect types for selection: standard, pop, rock, jazz, classic
or custom.
Custom sound effects for selection: bass, middle and treble.
● Touch " " to return to radio playing screen.
236
Operating method to enter radio

<
Update
FM AM
station list
FM88.8
● Touch " " to turn on radio

FM88.4
96.5 MHz
FM92.6 station list. If it is in FM wave

FM92.8 88 92 96 100 104 108 band, FM station list will be
FM93.3
displayed; if it is in AM wave
LO LO 1 2
band, AM station list will be
OMT15-5095
displayed.
● Touch Update to update radio stations.
● Touch " " to delete radio station.
● Touch " " to cancel station in your favorites.
● Touch " " to return to radio playing screen.
CAUTION
● When [Full Screen] in [Setting] is turned on, radio will be displayed in full 5
screen if there is no operation after waiting for 15 seconds.

● For FM, up to 20 stations can be added to your favorites. For AM, up to 20
stations can be added to your favorites.
237
Multimedia
Operating method to enter

multimedia screen
FM87.50
● Touch [Media] on main menu
MHz
Navi Media Phone to enter multimedia screen.

Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5184
■ Bluetooth music

BT Music
Bluetooth music screen
USB1 Music ● If Bluetooth is connected,
BT not connected,connect immediately? USB2 Music touch " BT Music " to enter
connect immediately
Video Bluetooth music screen.
● If Bluetooth is not connected,
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5007 please connect Bluetooth

system first. Refer to
"Bluetooth Connection" in this
chapter for Bluetooth
connection method.
Bluetooth music screen.

BT Music BT Music
● Touch " " to pause music
My Love Is Gone
Russian Red
USB1 Music playing.
● Touch " " to play music.
USB2 Music
Video
00:07/03:08
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5008
● Touch " " or " " to switch to previous track or next track.
● Touch " " to enter sound effect setting screen.
238
or custom.
● Touch " " to return to music playing screen.
CAUTION
● When [Full Screen] in [Setting] is turned on, Bluetooth music will be

displayed in full screen if there is no operation after waiting for 15 seconds.
● Bluetooth connection indication will be highlighted only when Bluetooth is
successfully connected.
● For audio file of MP3 format, the audio head unit can support up to 255
directories with 600 tracks and a maximum directory depth of 8 layers.
● When playing 8Kbps or VBR files, the displayed playing duration may be
wrong.
● Audio head unit can support SD card with maximum capacity of 32G; it can
support USB device with maximum capacity of 32G. But it is not applicable 5
to some SD cards or USB with poor compatibility. When inserting mobile
hard disk, audio head unit only supports mobile hard disk whose first

partition is FAT16 or FAT32 format. If used USB device is not supported, try
again after formatting the device, or use other USB devices.
239
■ USB music
Insert U disc to USB1 port (USB

port under air conditioning
control panel).
" 1 " indicator on screen
illuminates.
OMT15-5009
Insert U disc to USB2 port (USB

port inside front armrest box).
" 2 " indicator on screen
illuminates.
OMT15-5010
Touch " USB Music " or "

1 USB2 Music "
USB1 Music BT Music
to enter music screen.
My Love Is Gone USB1 Music
Russian Red
USB2 Music
Video
00:07/03:08
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5011
● Touch " " to pause music playing.

● Touch " " to switch track playing modes between repeat all
mode, random mode and single cycle mode.
● Touch " " to enter sound setting screen.
240
or custom.
● If there is no operation within 15 seconds, music will be displayed
in full screen.
CAUTION
● USB1 port (USB port under air conditioning control panel) of this product
supports USB audio and video playing, iPod audio playing, Cloudrive
Interconnection, charging, etc., functions. USB2 port (USB port inside
armrest box) does not support Cloudrive Interconnection or iPod audio
playing functions. It only supports USB audio and video playing, charging,
etc., functions.
● USB1 port supports iPod and iPhone professional equipment to play iPod
and iPhone music. Please use original wires provided by Apple Inc. to
5
connect vehicle USB1 port, so that audio head unit head unit can play the
music smoothly.

● For USB devices and SD card memory, audio head unit only supports FAT16
and FAT32 partitions. SDXC card is not supported. The maximum directory
depth is 8 layers.
● Maximum charging current of USB port is 1.5 A, so please do not insert a
USB device with large current. If audio head unit is damaged due to this, it is
not within the warranty scope. Certain phones cannot be charged perfectly
due to phone model differences.
241
■ iPod music
Insert iPod and press " USB

1 Music "
iPod Music BT Music
to enter iPod music screen.
THE STRUMBELLAS
Spirits USB1 Music
The strumbellas
USB2 Music
Video
00:07/03:08
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5012
CAUTION
Only USB1 port supports iPod devices.
● Touch " " to pause music playing.

● Touch " " to switch track playing modes between repeat all
mode, random mode and single cycle mode.
● Touch " " to enter sound setting screen.
or custom.
● If there is no operation within 15 seconds, music will be displayed
in full screen.
242
CAUTION
● Random and cycle playing modes of iPod are determined by iPod device
itself.
● Please connect iPod device to this audio system with original data line;
otherwise audio head unit may not play normally.
● If iPod authentication fails, or it cannot be read normally, pull out and insert
the iPod, or pull out and insert USB port which connects the audio system
again.
● Depends on models or software versions, etc., some models may be
incompatible with this system.
● If you connect your phone to audio system through Bluetooth and USB at
the same time, it may not play normally. Please select one connection
method and try again.
243
■ Video
Insert the mobile device and

USB1 Video BT Music touch " Video " to enter video
Waiting USB1 Music playing screen.

USB2 Music
Video
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5013
● Touch " " to pause playing.

● Touch " " to play current video.
● Touch " " or " " to switch to previous video or next video.
● Touch " " to play the video in full screen.
● Touch " " to enter video setting screen.
Video source
The path to play video can be selected.
Sound effect setting
or custom.
● Touch " " to return to video playing screen.
244
■ Picture

USB1 Picture USB2 Music touch " Picture " to enter picture
Video display screen.

Picture
1-01
Text
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5014
● Touch picture area to view current picture.

● Touch " " or " " to switch to previous picture or next picture.
● Touch " " to play pictures in slideshow mode.
● Touch " " to enter picture source list.
● You can choose USB1 or USB2 as the picture path.
● Touch " " to enter picture list screen. You can view the list 5
according to picture list or document folder.

● Touch " " to return to picture main screen.
245
■ Text

USB1 Text
USB2 Music touch " Text " to enter text
readme Video display screen.

Picture
Text
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5015
● Touch [Text] area to view current text.

● Touch " " to enter full screen and play the text automatically.
● Touch " " to return to text main screen.
● Touch " " or " " to switch to previous text or next text.
● Touch " " to enter text setting screen.
● Font size
Available font: big, secondary,
<
< Text Source USB2
Font Size
small.
<
Secondary
ease
Big
● Play speed
Secondary
Small
Speed Normal Available text play speed: fast,

<
normal, slow.
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5016
● Text source
You can choose USB1 or USB2 as the text path.
● Touch " " to return to picture main screen.
● Touch " " to enter text source screen and view text list according
to text list or document folder.
● Touch " " to return to text main screen.
246
Communication

communication screen
● Touch [Phone] to enter
FM87.50
MHz
Media Phone
Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System communication screen.
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5017
■ Bluetooth connection
Touch [connect immediately] to

enter Bluetooth connection
screen.
Open BT
5
Use phone function after the connection is successful

connect immediately
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5018
● When connecting Bluetooth

< BT Connection for the first time, touch [Add
HU Name TIGGO 7-87DB03
Device] area to enter [Add
>>>>>
Device] list, and then search
Add Device click to add
Available Detele All
Galaxy A8 the device.

vivo Y51
● When available device list

displays device record, touch
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5019
the device name in available
list to enter [Available Device]
list and connect the device.
247
● Touch [Delete All] in available list to empty the connection list

devices.
● Touch [connect immediately], so Bluetooth can be connected
successfully.
● Touch [Cancel] or " " button to exit added device list and return
to Bluetooth connection screen.
CAUTION
● The time for adding devices is 180 seconds. When the countdown ends up,
[Add Again] button will be highlighted. Press [Add Again] button to search for
devices.
● For first connection, the pairing operation between phone Bluetooth and
vehicle audio system Bluetooth must be done manually.
● If the connection fails, press [Add Again], and make sure device Bluetooth is
turned on and within the communication scope.
■ Bluetooth setting
Touch " Setting " to enter Bluetooth

< BT Connection
connection setting screen.
HU Name TIGGO 7-87DB03
Recent 1 2 3
Add Device click to add
Dial
4 5 6
Available Detele All
7 8 9
Contacts
vivo Y51
* 0 #
Galaxy A8
Setting
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5020
CAUTION
At this time, connected device is highlighted, and the device adding area is
dark, which means the area is not operational.
248
Touch [Connected Device] in

< Connected Device available devices to enter
TIGGO 7-87DB03
Recent 1 2 3 connected devices list.
4 5 6
vivo Y51 Dial
7 8 9
● Touch [Disconnect] to
Disconnect Contacts
* 0 # disconnect current device.

Delete
Setting
LO LO 1 2
● Touch " " button to exit
OMT15-5021 connected devices list.
● Touch [Delete] button, so that
current connected device
record will be deleted and the
connection will be
disconnected.
CAUTION
5
● The system Bluetooth has obtained relevant certification. During operation, if
Bluetooth cannot be connected or the function is abnormal after connection,

check if your phone confirms to international Bluetooth standard design
requirements.
● If several devices are connected to Bluetooth, the connection may fail or
unstable. In this case, please reconnect it.
● When the system is connected to your phone through Bluetooth, phone call
will produce electromagnetic radiation, which will affect your body health.
● Turn on head unit Bluetooth, and then use your phone to search and
connect Bluetooth device.
● High speed driving may lead to intermittent Bluetooth call.
● Depends on the Bluetooth module of different phone brands, when playing
Bluetooth music, staccato phenomenon may occur, it will connect
automatically after a few seconds.
249
■ Contacts
Touch " Contacts " to enter contacts

Contacts
list screen.
A B C D
Recent
E F G H
Dial I J K L
M N O P You have no contact
Contacts Q R S T
U V W X
Setting
Y Z
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5022
● Touch [Yes] to download

Sync Contacts Rapid Retrieval phonebook. If the downloading
fails, check that device
Please make authorization on your
phone after downloads finished. Old
records will be auto removed. Recent
Dial Bluetooth is on and within the

Yes
Contacts phonebook scope. After
successfully downloading, you
No
Setting
HI HI 1 2 can view contact information on

OMT15-5023
device.
● Touch [No] or " " to exit
phonebook download screen,
and return to contact main
screen.
When phonebook is not downloaded, [Phonebook Download] screen
will be displayed on the screen.
After phonebook is downloaded successfully, enter contact main
screen.
● Touch the initial to view contacts in the phonebook list.
● Touch " " to delete the letter in input box.
● Touch " " in phonebook list to empty contact list.
● Touch a contact in phonebook list to make call to the person.
250
■ Dial screen
When phonebook is not

Rapid Retrieval downloaded.
Recent 1 2 3 ● Touch numeric keypad to dial
Dial
4 5 6
directly.
7 8 9
Contacts
Setting
* 0 #
● Touch " " to make a call
LO LO 1 2
through vehicle audio system.
OMT15-5024
● Touch " " to make a call on
mobile terminal.
● Touch " " to delete the
input phone number.
■ Touch [Dial] to enter dial screen
● After phonebook is downloaded successfully, contact information
5
will be displayed on dial screen.
Rapid retrieval: input number to retrieval contact stored in the

phonebook.
Touch " " to delete the input phone number.
Touch a contact in rapid retrieval list to make call to the person.
■ Outgoing call screen
● Touch " " to hang up the call, stop dialing and return to dial
screen.
■ Incoming call screen
● Touch " " to hang up the current call.
● Touch " " to hang up the incoming call, and reply current contact
with text message.
● Touch " " to answer the call.
251
■ On the phone screen
● Touch " " to hang up the

current call.
13088888888
On the phone ● Touch " " to turn off vehicle
00:09 audio system microphone to
realize mute function.
LO LO 1 2
● Touch " " or " " to
OMT15-5025 switch vehicle audio system
call mode.
● Touch " " to turn on or turn off keyboard mode.
● Touch numbers on the keyboard to input corresponding numbers in
the input box.
● Touch " " to delete the input phone number.
■ Recent
● Touch [Recent] button to enter

Recent recent call list.
13088888888 Incoming 11:07:43
Recent
18712345678 Outgoing 11:07:04
Dial
Contacts
Setting
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5026
● After Bluetooth is connected, when making a call or receiving a

call, the recent call list will download call history.
● Touch a contact in call history to make a call.
252
Cloudrive Interconnection
CLOUDRIVE provides a personalized car service and safety driving,

which is the phone extension in car.
Touch " Cloudrive System " area or touch

FM87.50
MHz
" " button on control panel to
turn on Cloudrive
Media Phone
Outside 9.0°
Cloudrive System
L0 L0 1 2
Interconnection connection
prompt.
OMT15-5027
● Connect the "Cloudrive Interconnection" according to prompt

information on the touch screen.
CAUTION 5
● Never operate the Cloudrive Interconnection function while driving, to avoid

safety problems.
● When using Cloudrive Interconnection function, please fix your phone, to
avoid the phone from falling off during driving, which may damage your
phone.
● Depends on phone models, the Cloudrive Interconnection may not support
your phone.
● There will be traffic cost when using Cloudrive Interconnection function.
● When connecting a phone, please try to use original USB data line;
otherwise the connection may be unstable.
● During operation of Cloudrive Interconnection, audio system can also
charge the phone. If phone power consumption is larger than charging
volume, it may reduce the phone power.
● When using Cloudrive Interconnection, if phone data line is loose,
connection may be disconnected due to vehicle bumping.
253
1. For the first time to connect

This system supports Android and ios system,please consult the instructions for more help. your phone to Cloudrive
1.Scan QR code to download
Chery Assistant APP!
2.Please connect Bluetooth and
USB with the same phone!
Interconnection, you need to
download a "Chery Assistant
APP". You can scan QR code
BT and Phone are not connected
on audio head unit terminal to
L0 L0 1 2
download the installation
OMT15-5028 package, or search "Chery
Assistant" in phone "App
Market", and then download
and install it.
2. Touch "Install" on phone

terminal to install the
application program.
OMT15-5029
3. Connect "Bluetooth" and "USB1" of the same phone to vehicle

audio system. For Bluetooth connection, please refer to Bluetooth
connection section in this chapter.
254
4. After connecting to audio head

unit USB1 port through phone
data line, the phone will jump
to "Developer options" screen
automatically. At this time,
"USB debugging" switch
should be turned on manually.
OMT15-5030
5
5. When connect for the first

time, check "Always allow
from this computer" and touch
the "OK" button.
When inserting the USB,
check the default to use this
USB and touch the "OK"
button.
OMT15-5031
255
6. Connecting the USB to the

infotainment, if the Message
Box "Allow USB debugging" is
shown on the phone, please
check "Always allow from this
computer" and touch the "OK"
button.
OMT15-5032
Caution: If "BT and Phone are

< 3.Switch on the developer 4.Tick“Always allow from this
not connected" is displayed in
options,tick“USB debugging” computer”and determine.
and determine.
the lower part of screen, it
5.Tick“Use by default for this
USB accessory”and determine
indicates Bluetooth and phone
are not successfully connected.
when connected USB.
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5033
256
7. After above operations are

completed, Chery Assistant
will operate automatically and
"Connected Cherylink" will be
displayed.
)UTTKIZKJ)NKX_ROTQ
OMT15-5034
5
CAUTION

As for information and phonebook access request, please give permission for
usage of message and phonebook to "Chery Assistant". Select "Remember
my choice" and touch "OK".
257
Cloudrive Interconnection Operating Method
In the Cloudrive Interconnection screen, click soft button to enter

application list screen. After entering Cloudrive Interconnection, click
each application soft button to use calendar, message, phonebook,
etc., applications. Applications installed in phone can also be
displayed in the list.
● Calendar, message and

phonebook data all come from
the phone system native
Iist
Install People calendar Message

applications.
Update
● Depending on application
design, horizontal screen may
Delete
not be supported after

LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5179
interconnected.
Install phone applications to

Cloudrive Interconnection screen
LETV Install
Iist
Master lu Install ● Click soft button " Install "

in Cloudrive Interconnection
Install
KuGou Install
Update
Weather Install screen to enter application
Delete
QQ Install installation screen. Click soft
LO LO 1 2
button [Install] to install the

OMT15-5180
application to application list.
Update phone application
LETV Update
● Click soft button Update in
Iist
Master lu Update
Cloudrive Interconnection
screen to enter application
Install
KuGou Update
Update
Weather Update updating screen. Click soft
Delete
QQ Update button [Update] to update the
LO LO 1 2
installed applications.
OMT15-5181
258
Delete
LETV Delete
● Click soft button Delete in
Iist
Master lu Delete Cloudrive Interconnection

screen to enter deleting
Install
KuGou Delete
Update
Weather Delete screen. Click soft button
Delete
QQ Delete [Delete] to delete installed
LO LO 1 2
applications.
OMT15-5182
CAUTION
● Calendar, message and phonebook are pre-installed applications, which

cannot be installed/deleted.
● Only applications installed by user in Android phone application
management list can be displayed in application management list.
■ Uninstall Phone App 5

1. Enter "setting" → "Manage
apps".
OMT15-5038
259
2. Find "Cloudrive" app.
OMT15-5039
3. Touch the "Uninstall" button.
OMT15-5040
260
Exit Cloudrive Interconnection

● Exit Cloudrive Interconnection by pulling out USB data line or
disconnect Bluetooth.
CAUTION
● Calendar, message and phonebook are pre-installed applications, which

cannot be installed/deleted.
● Only applications installed by user in Android phone application
management list can be displayed in application management list.
■ Obtaining and using of Chery Assistant
● Scan QR code on audio head

This system supports Android and ios system,please consult the instructions for more help.
unit terminal to download the
1.Scan QR code to download
Chery Assistant APP!
2.Please connect Bluetooth and
USB with the same phone! installation package, or search
"Chery Assistant" in phone 5
"App Market", and then
download and install it.

L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5028
OMT15-5041
● Start Chery Assistant after installation is completed.
261
● Installed: pre-installed applications and customized applications

are displayed in "Installed" page. Pre-installed applications consist
of calendar, message and phonebook.
● Software: select application list to display customized applications
on "Software" page. You can select your favorite customized
applications, and click "Download" button to download. Pause/
continue/retry/standby operations can be found during
downloading. After downloading is completed, you can install the
application.
● Update: when an application needs to update occurs in installed
applications, application to be updated will be displayed on
"Update" page. Click "Update" button to update the application.
After application is successfully updated, it will disappear from the
[Update] page.
● Download: select application list and display all applications being
downloaded on "Download" page. Press and hold the application
to display delete button, and then click it to delete download tasks.
● Clear audio head unit package: select application management to
display all installed applications in "Clear audio head unit package"
page, and click "Clear" button. After confirmation box popping out,
select clear or cancel according to you desire.
● Setup: select application management to set and view "Only WIFI
network download", "Switch to Chinese or English", "Switch
interconnection version", "New version description", "Tips & Help",
"Upgrade Check" and "About" on "Setting" page.
● Switch interconnection version: when you enter interconnection for
the first time, system will guide you to choose the version number
corresponding to your car model. You can see your car model in
the version, select it and click "Confirm" to complete and save it.
262
CAUTION
● For some phones, to use the functions of "Full mapping application", you
need run the phone access setting. "Chery Assistant" will jump to permission
screen automatically, please give permission to "Chery Assistant" access.
● Customized application will be displayed in "Installed" list only after it is
installed.
● When an updated application occurs, a red dot will appear on update label.
263
Common Questions of Cloudrive Interconnection
Q: What access permissions should be set after installing Chery

Assistant?
A: "Send Message", "Make Calls", "Read Messages", "Read
Contact" and calendar access permissions should be set.
Q: What will happen if above access permissions are not set?
A: Chery Assistant APP consists of "phonebook", "message",
"calendar", etc., applications which need to obtain phone
information. If the access permissions are not set, these
applications cannot be used; for example, calls cannot be made,
messages cannot be sent, contact information cannot be
obtained, notes on calendar cannot be viewed on audio head
unit, etc., conditions, so we recommend you to set the access
permissions.
Q: How to turn on USB debugging mode on Android phone?
A: If phone failed to automatically turn on "Developer options" page
during audio head unit connection steps, please try to turn it on
manually. Click "About device" in "Setting" function; Click "Internal
Version No." according to phone instructions, to turn on
"Developer options"; click "Developer options"; turn on "USB
debugging".
Q: "Phone application abnormal" prompts in audio head unit after
phone is connect to it by USB
A: Please make sure "Chery Assistant" is correctly installed in
phone; click "USB connected" option in down swiping notification
bar, select "MTP media device" (down swiping notification bar for
Xiaomi phone, Huawei phone, etc.; select "View picture" mode in
USB connection mode; for some HTC phones, you need to click
"USB connected" in the down swiping notification bar, and select
"MirrorLink" connection in current page) mode.
264
Q: "Bluetooth device does not match USB device" prompts in audio

head unit after connection
A: Please confirm that Bluetooth device and USB device are
connected to the same phone
Q: What should be done in case the connection fails?
A: Firstly, please check if the connection steps are the same as
those described in Cloudrive Interconnection connection chapter.
If problem can not be solved, try to connect again after restarting
your phone. If connection still cannot be built, please contact 4S
shop.
Q: For some phones, some application icons disappeared after
using "Cloudrive Interconnection".
A: As Android phone has bugs in SD card management, we
recommend you to install all applications in memory card of
phone uses "Cloudrive Interconnection".
5
Supported File Formats

This product does not support video files with high resolution and big
bit-stream, and due to picture quality or other reasons, some video
files may not be displayed perfectly.
Supported types:
Audio: mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac, .ogg.
Video: .avi, .mp4, .wmv, .asf, .dat, .mpg, .mov, .mpeg-4, .vob, .mkv.
Picture: JPG, BMP.
■ Correspondence relationship of audio format and coding
format
Supported Audio
File Format Name File Extension TAG
Coding
MP3 *.mp3 MP1, MP2, MP3 ID3v1, ID3v2
ASF Audio *.wma WMA/Pro/Lossless ASF
OGG *.ogg Vorbis NA
265
■ Detailed parameter of audio coding
Codec Name Mode/Detail Sample Rate (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps) [4]
32, 40, 48, 56, 64,

MPEG-1 Audio
32, 44.1, 48 80, 96, 112, 128,
Layer Ⅲ 160, 192, 224, 256
MP3 16, 24, 32, 40, 48,
MPEG-2 Audio 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
16, 22.05, 24
Layer Ⅲ 128, 144, 160 [1]
[2]
32, 48, 56, 64, 80,
MPEG-1 Audio
32, 44.1, 48 96, 112, 128, 160,
Layer Ⅱ 192, 224, 256, 320
MP2
MPEG-2 Audio
16, 22.05, 24 16, 24, 40, 144 [2]
Layer Ⅱ
32, 64, 96, 128,
MPEG-1 Audio
32, 44.1, 48 160, 192, 224, 256,
Layer Ⅰ 288, 320, 352, 354
MP1
MPEG-2 Audio 48, 56, 80, 112,
16, 22.05, 24
Layer Ⅰ 144, 176
8, 10, 12, 16, 20,

22, 24, 32, 40, 48,
16, 22.05, 32, 44.1,
CBR-1 PASS 63, 64, 80, 95, 96,
48
127, 128, 160, 191,
192, 256
8, 10, 12, 16, 20,

22, 24, 32, 40, 48,
16, 22.05, 32, 44.1,
CBR-2 PASS 63, 64, 80, 95, 96,
WMA 48
127, 128, 160, 191,
192, 256
48, 64, 96, 128,

VBR Constrained 44.1, 48
160, 192
48, 64, 96, 128,

VBR Unconstrained 44.1, 48
160, 192
VBR Quality 44.1, 48 NOT SPECIFIED
266
Codec Name Mode/Detail Sample Rate (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps) [4]
32, 48, 64, 80, 96,

CBR-1 PASS 32, 44.1, 48 127, 128, 160, 191,
192, 256, 384
32, 48, 64, 80, 96,

CBR-2 PASS 32, 44.1, 48 127, 128, 160, 191,
192, 256, 384
WMA Pro
48, 64, 128, 192,
VBR Constrained 44.1, 48
256, 384
48, 64, 128, 192,

VBR Unconstrained 44.1, 48
256, 384
VBR Quality 44.1, 48 NOT SPECIFIED
WMA Lossless - 44.1, 48 NOT SPECIFIED
Vorbis - 8~48 8~256
Note:
[1] Both CBR and VBR are supported. 5
[2] 8 kbps is also supported by test.

[3] Not all the bitrate are available for each supported sample
frequency.
[4] All bitrates listed here are supported, but there is no restriction on
bitrate.
■ Correspondence relationship of video format and coding
format
Supported Video Supported Audio
File Format Name File Extension
Coding Coding
H.264/Divx4-6/
MKV *.mkv MP3
Xvid/MPEG4
Xvid/MPEG4/
AVI *.avi MP2/MP3/AAC
Divx4-6/H.264
ASF *.wmv *.asf WMV9 WMAv9/Pro
MPG *.mpg *.vob *.dat MPEG1/MPEG2 MP1/MP210
NOTE:
[1] No support for plug-in subtitle.
267
[2] No support for seek operation.

■ Max Supported Resolution, Max Supported FPS, Max
Supported Mbps of Video.
Supported
Frame Rate Bit Rate
Codec Name Resolution Note
(FPS) (Mbps)
(Max)
No Support for
H264 BP 1920x1080 30 4
FMO/ASO/RS
[1] 3Mbps
(CABAC),
H264 MP/HP 1920x1080 25 [1]
4MBPS
(CAVLC)
AP support up
to Pro
VC1 SP/MP/
1920x1080 30 4 gressiveonly
AP
(interlaced not
included)
No support for
MPEG4 SP/
1920x1080 30 4 GMC (Global
ASP
Motion
Divx 4/5/6 1920x1080 30 4 No support for

Xvid ASP 1920x1080 30 4 No support for
MPEG1 1920x1080 30 2 -
Up to main
MPEG1 1920x1080 30 8
Profile Main
268
System Setting
● Press [SET] button on control

Full Screen Quit
panel to enter [Setting] menu
Screen Switch
Screen Brightness 10 >

Display Setting
Sound Setting screen.

Screen Background Background 1 > Vehicle Setting
● Touch "
Restore Default Settings System Setting
L0 L0
Quick Guide
1 2
Quit " to exit
system setting screen.
OMT15-5042
■ Display setting
Touch " " to

enter display setting screen.
Full Screen Quit
Screen Switch Display Setting
Screen Brightness 10 > Sound Setting ● Full screen mode 5

Screen Background Background 1 > Vehicle Setting
It can be set to on or off.

Restore Default Settings System Setting
Quick Guide
When it is on, multimedia playing
L0 L0
screen can be displayed in full
1 2
OMT15-5043
screen; when it is off, full screen

cannot be realized.
● Screen switch
When it is set to on, vehicle audio system screen will be turned off;
touch the screen to activate it.
● Screen brightness
< Brightness
It is used to adjust screen
Full Screen
Screen Switch
brightness. (1-10)
Screen Brightness
Screen Background
Restore Default Settings
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5044
269
● Screen background
< Screen Background
It can adjust colors of screen
Full Screen
Background 1 Screen Switch

background - background 1 or
Background 2 Screen Brightness
Screen Background
background 2.
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5045
● Restore default settings

Touch [Restore Default Settings] to restore the vehicle audio system
to default settings.
■ Sound setting
Touch to enter sound setting screen.
It can be adjusted to on or off.

● Key tone
Loudness Quit
Key Tone Display Setting
Sound Setting Standard > Sound Setting It can be adjusted to on or off.

Sound Field Setting > Vehicle Setting
Speed Volume Middle > System Setting

● Calling report
Default Volume 5 > Quick Guide
It can be adjusted to on or off.
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5046 When vehicle audio system

coming call is turned off, caller
number or name will not
reported.
270
● Loudness
● Sound effect setting

< Sound Effects
Custom <
Loudness
Sound effect can be set to
Key Tone
Standard standard, pop, rock, jazz, classic
Sound Setting
Pop
Sound Field Setting
or custom.
Rock
Sneed Volume
Jazz
Default Volume
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5047
● Custom sound effect

< Sound Effects
The values of bass, middle and
Loudness
<
Custom
Key Tone
treble can be set.
Sound Setting
Sound Field Setting
5
Bass Middle Treble Speed Volume
Default Volume
LO LO 1 2

OMT15-5048
● Sound field setting

< Adjust Sound Field
Sound field range can be
Loudness
Key Tone
adjusted.
Sound Setting
Sound Field Setting
Speed Volume
Default Volume
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5049
● Speed volume
< Adjust Speed Vol.
Speed volume can be set to
Sound Setting
Close
Sound Field Setting
High
close, high, middle or low.
Speed Volume
Middle
Default Volume
Low
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5050
271
● Speed volume
● Default volume
< Default Volume
Volume can be set from 5 to 25.
Sound Setting
25
Sound Field Setting
Speed Volume
Default Volume
5 Restore Default Settings
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5051

< Restore Sound Settin
Sound Setting
Touch [Restore Default Settings]
Sound Field Setting
to restore the vehicle audio sys-
Speed Volume
Default Volume
tem to factory settings.
OK
Cancel Restore Default Settings
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5052
272
■ Vehicle setting
Touch " " to

enter vehicle setting screen.
Quit
DRL Display Setting
Rear Camera Sound Setting ● Blind spot monitoring: can be

set as ON or OFF.

● Daytime running light
L0 L0
1 2
OMT15-5053
● Rear Camera: can be set as ON or OFF.

When vehicle becomes motionless upon startup, go to the rear view
camera page to check the surrounding environment of the vehicle.
● Security tips
< Select Security Tips
Available security tips are light,
Light
DRL
5
Horn horn, light and horn.
Rear Camera

Lights and Horn
Security Tips
Speed Alarm
Instrument Time
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5055
● Speed alarm
< Set Speed Alarm
It can be set to off or any speed
110
DRL
115 lower than 130 km/h.
Rear Camera
120 km/h
125 Security Tips

130
Speed Alarm
Instrument Time
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5056
273
● Instrument time
< Set Instrument Time
It is used to adjust instrument
Security Tips
17 6
Speed Alarm
18 7
time.
19 Hour 8 Minute Instrument Time
20 9
21 10
OK
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5058
● Instrument backlight
< Instrument Backlight
Security Tips
Instrument backlight can be set
Speed Alarm
from 1 to 10.
Instrument Time
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5059

< Vehicle Setting
Touch [Restore Default Settings]
Security Tips
Speed Alarm
to restore the vehicle audio sys-
Instrument Time
tem to factory settings.
OK
Cancel Restore Default Setting
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5060
274
■ System setting
● System information
< System Info
View the version information of
System Info
OS:Linux
Radio Area
SW:SW0007.1 current vehicle audio system.
Factory Reset
HW:HW007
No.
9ED1020A6FD3752
LO LO 1 2
OMT15-5061
● Radio area
< Radio Area
Set radio area to China, U.S.A,
System Info
Asia Radio Area

Europe or Latin America.
U.S.A Factory Reaet
Europe
Latin America
5
L0 L0 1 2

OMT15-5062
● Factory reset
< Factory Reset
Touch [Factory Reset] to restore
System Info
Radio Area
factory settings.
Factory Reset
OK
Cancel
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5063
● Quick guide
1.Buletooth Quit
2.Cloudrive Display Setting Touch to learn

3.Exceptions/Factory Reset Sound Setting
the using method of audio
system functions quickly.
4.Other Vehicle Setting
System Setting
Quick Guide
L0 L0 1 2
OMT15-5064
275
Steering Wheel Quick Buttons
2 3 4 10 11
SET/- RES/+
1 MODE 5 9 ON/OFF
VOL
8 7 6 13 12
SET/- RES/+
MODE ON/OFF
VOL
SRS
AIRBAG
OMT15-5065
Instrument cluster screen switch Decrease volume VOL-

left button ● Short press: decrease volume
Instrument cluster screen switch ● Long press: continuously
button decrease volume
Short press: tune to a station at Increase volume VOL+
higher frequency or previous ● Short press: increase volume
track ● Long press: continuously
● Long press: fast rewind (audio increase volume
and video) Cruise control switch
Short press: tune to a station at Cruise control slow down button
lower frequency or next track Cruise control speed up button
● Long press: fast forward (audio Hang up button
and video) Answer button
Mode switch button ● Incoming call: answer the call
● Switch between radio - ● Standby: click to enter
Bluetooth music - USB1 music Bluetooth screen, and click
- USB2 music - radio in a loop. again to enter call records. If
Instrument cluster screen switch Bluetooth is not connected, it
right button will enter connection prompt
screen; select a number to
make a call.
276
5-2. Air Conditioning System
Automatic Air Conditioning System (if equipped)
■ Air conditioning control panel

Temperature adjustment knob
1 2 3 4 5 Front defrosting mode button
Rear defrosting mode button
Air conditioning OFF button
AUTO switch
7 6
OMT15-5066 Air conditioning interface
display button
When operating air conditioning system, the corresponding
information will display on the display.
■ Air conditioning control interface on audio head unit
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Left temperature increase/
decrease button

DUAL ● Dual zone mode: adjust
+ +
20.5° AUTO 20.5° driver side temperature
_ _
A/C
● Single zone mode: adjust
driver side temperature and
13 12 11 10 9 front passenger side
OMT15-5067
temperature simultaneously
Air flow mode
Air conditioning interface retracted button
Outside air mode button
Front defrosting button
● Power button, and enter front defrosting mode after turning the
system on
DUAL: dual zone air conditioning switch
AUTO button
277
● Power button, and air conditioning operates automatically after

turning the system on
Right temperature increase/decrease button
● Dual zone mode: adjust front passenger side temperature
● Single zone mode: adjust driver side temperature and front
passenger side temperature simultaneously
A/C button
● Operate the button manually to turn compressor on or off
Recirculated air mode button
Power switch: touch to turn A/C on or off
Display vehicle operating condition
Air volume increase/decrease button
CAUTION
Air conditioning system may cool and absorb moisture from air, forming
condensed water on the evaporator. Therefore, when the air conditioning
cooling is operating, it is normal that small area of water occurs under the
vehicle after parking the vehicle for a while.
278
AUTO Switch
Press AUTO switch on air

conditioning control panel or
+
DUAL
+
display, air conditioning begins to
20.5° AUTO 20.5° operate. Mode damper, inside
_
A/C
_
and outside circulation damper
and air volume of air conditioning
operate automatically according
to the temperature setting.
● When in AUTO mode, AUTO
indicator comes on, blue
background light of word
P
L
"AUTO" on display comes on.
● When not in AUTO mode, 5
press AUTO button to enter

OMT15-5068
AUTO mode; in AUTO mode,
press AUTO button, AUTO
mode does not change.
279
■ Solar sensor and room temperature sensor
1
Solar sensor
Room temperature sensor
Automatic air conditioning
system can detect change of
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
temperature and amount of

sunlight in the vehicle and
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
outside the vehicle. And set

temperature inside the vehicle
2 according to measured value.
OMT15-5069
L
CAUTION
Do not clog or block the sensor while driving.
280
Air Conditioning Interface Display Button
Press air conditioning interface

display button on air conditioning
control panel, air conditioning
information is displayed on the
display, and it will disappear after
10 seconds.
P
● If air conditioning panel or

D
OMT15-5070
display interface has been
operated during display, the
information will disappear after
10 seconds starting from the
last operating.
■ Air conditioning operation interface on touch display 5
● Operate the following button

after displaying air conditioning
+
DUAL
+
operation interface on display:
20.5° AUTO 20.5° air volume button/front
_
A/C
_
defrosting button/AUTO button/
ON/OFF button, to turn the air
conditioning on.
OMT15-5071
281
Front Defrosting Button
● With air conditioning off, press

front defrosting button to turn
+
DUAL
+ air conditioning on, and air
20.5° AUTO 20.5°
conditioning is in front
_ _
defrosting mode (front
A/C
defrosting operation indicator

comes on), air volume is in 6
level, mode is in outside air
mode, and A/C is on.
● With air conditioning on, press
front defrosting button, air
P

OMT15-5072 comes on), air volume is in 6
● With air conditioning on, if air
defrosting mode, operate front
defrosting button, mode is in
front defrosting previous
mode.
282
OFF Switch
Press "OFF" switch or touch

" " to turn off air conditioning.
● After turning off air
DUAL
+ +
conditioning, it will
20.5° AUTO 20.5°
_ _
A/C
automatically switch to outside

air mode, temperature is max
cool and remains at the mode
before turning it off.

OMT15-5074
DUAL Switch
Touch DUAL switch on display,

air conditioning system switches
DUAL
between single zone mode and
+ +
dual zone mode.
20.5° AUTO 16.5°
_
A/C
_
When DUAL switch is
highlighted, it indicates that air
conditioning system is in dual
OMT15-5075
zone mode; When the switch is
grayed out, it indicates that air
conditioning system is in single
zone mode.
283
Left/Right Temperature Adjustment Knob
■ Single zone mode
Regardless of whether left

temperature adjustment knob or
right temperature adjustment
knob is adjusted, air temperature
of driver side and front
passenger side can be controlled
simultaneously.
P
OMT15-5076
■ Dual zone mode
● Left temperature adjustment

knob controls driver side
+
DUAL
+ temperature.
20.5° AUTO 16.5°
_
A/C
_ Turn the temperature
adjustment knob clockwise to
increase the temperature, and
turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature.
OMT15-5077
284
● Right temperature adjustment

knob controls front passenger
+
DUAL
+ side temperature.
15.5° AUTO 20.5°
_
A/C
_ Turn the temperature
adjustment knob clockwise to
increase the temperature, and
turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature.
OMT15-5078
5
● Temperature rises by 0.5 degree each time the knob is turned
clockwise. When temperature is raised to HI, it will maintain at HI if

turning the knob clockwise again.
● Temperature decreases by 0.5 degree each time the knob is
turned counterclockwise. When temperature is decreased to LOW,
it will maintain at LOW if turning the knob counterclockwise again.
● When temperature is set at "Low", in AUTO mode: mode is in
recirculated air mode, compressor is turned on forcibly, air volume
is at maximum level, air flows to the face, AUTO on the display is
not displayed and AUTO indicator on the panel does not come on.
● When temperature is set at "HI", in AUTO mode: air volume is at
maximum level, mix damper is at max warm position.
285
Blower Governer Switch
Touch to increase air

volume, when air volume is at
DUAL
maximum level, it will not
+ +
change if pressing the button
20.5° AUTO 16.5°
_ _
again.
A/C
Touch to decrease air

volume, when air volume is at
OMT15-5079 minimum level, it will not
change if pressing the button
again.
Mode Switch
To select the airflow direction,

touch the mode switch. Air
DUAL
conditioning system will work in
+ +
mode that the switch indicates.
20.5° AUTO 16.5°
_ _
A/C
OMT15-5080
286
■ Air flows to the upper body

Air flows mainly from the instrument
panel vents.
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
5
OMT15-5081

■ Air flows to the upper body and feet
Air flows mainly from the floor
vents and instrument panel
vents.
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
OMT15-5082
287
■ Air flows to the feet

vents.
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
OMT15-5083
■ Air flows to the feet, front windshield and front windows

vents, front windshield defroster
vents and side defroster vents.
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
OMT15-5084
■ Air flows only to the windshield and front windows

Air flows mainly from the front
windshield defroster vents and
side defroster vents.
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
OMT15-5085
CAUTION
If windshield fogs up while driving, it is recommended to use defrost mode.
288
A/C Switch
Touch A/C switch to operate air

conditioning compressor, and A/
DUAL
C switch indicator will come on at
+ +
the same time. Press A/C switch
20.5° AUTO 16.5°
_ _
again, air conditioning
A/C
compressor will stop operating

and indicator will go off.
OMT15-5086
Operation conditions for air conditioning refrigeration system:

● The engine is running.
● Turn the blower on.
● Turn the A/C switch on.
5
CAUTION

When the air conditioning is on, if driving uphill continuously or in congestion of
traffic for a long time, the engine may be overheating. Observe the engine
coolant high temperature warning light. If the engine overheats, it is suggested
to turn off the air conditioning.
289
Outside/Recirculated Air Mode Switch
Press the outside/recirculated air

mode switch to switch between
DUAL
outside air and recirculated air
+ +
20.5° AUTO 20.5°
modes. Touch the switch,
_
A/C
_ corresponding mode indicator
will come on.
OMT15-5087
Recirculated air mode: The inside air recirculates in the vehicle.

Outside air mode: Vehicle ventilates normally when outside air enters
the vehicle.
Use recirculated air mode under the following conditions:
● In dusty environment.
● To prevent the outside exhaust gas from entering into the vehicle.
● To quickly cool or heat inside air.
● Insulate other unusual smells from outside.
CAUTION
Do not use the recirculated air mode for a long period of time, because the
inside air will become turbidity.
290
Air Outlets Airflow Control
Adjust airflow direction of air outlets and airflow volume by pulling

adjustment lever and turning knob.
■ Center outlets

P
OMT15-5088
● Pull adjustment lever of center outlets up and down, and left and
right by hand to adjust airflow direction.
291
■ Side outlets
1 1
2 2
OMT15-5089
● Pull adjustment lever of side outlets up and down, and left and right
by hand to adjust airflow direction.
● Turn the knob toward 1 to increase the airflow volume.
● Turn the knob toward 2 to decrease the airflow volume.
292
■ Armrest outlets
5
OMT15-5090
● Pull adjustment lever of side outlets up and down, and left and right

by hand to adjust airflow direction.
● Turn the knob toward 1 to increase the airflow volume.
● Turn the knob toward 2 to decrease the airflow volume.
293
Electric Air Conditioning System
Fan speed adjustment knob

1 2 3 4 5 Front defrosting mode button
Rear defrosting mode button
)
Air conditioning OFF button
A/C switch
7 6
OMT15-5096 Air conditioning interface
display button
Electric Air Conditioning Control Interface on Audio Head Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 Air volume increase/decrease

adjustment
Air flow mode adjustment
Air conditioning Interface
A/C
retracted arrow
Front defrosting button
10 9 8 7 Outside air mode button
OMT15-5097
Temperature increase/
decrease adjustment
Recirculated air mode button
A/C button
Power button
Vehicle condition display
CAUTION
Air conditioning system may cool and absorb moisture from air, forming
condensed water on the evaporator. Therefore, when the air conditioning
cooling is operating, it is normal that small area of water occurs under the
vehicle after parking the vehicle for a while.
294
Air Conditioning Interface Display Button
Press air conditioning interface

display button on air conditioning
control panel, air conditioning
information is displayed on the
AC
display, and it will disappear after 5

seconds.
P
● If air conditioning panel or

D
OMT15-5098
display interface has been
operated during display, the
information will disappear after
5 seconds starting from the
last operating.
295
Front Defrosting Button
● With air conditioning off, press

front defrosting button to turn
air conditioning on, and air
A/C

comes on), air volume is in 6
AC ● With air conditioning on, press
front defrosting button, air
P

OMT15-5099 comes on), air volume is in 6
● With air conditioning on, if air
defrosting mode, operate front
defrosting button, mode is in
front defrosting previous
mode.
296
OFF Switch
Press "OFF" switch or touch " "

to turn off air conditioning.
A/C
conditioning, it will
automatically switch to outside
air mode, temperature is max
cool and remains at the mode
before turning it off.
AC

OMT15-5100
297
Air Volume Adjustment Knob
There are 7 air volume levels,

actual level of air volume is
displayed on the display.
● Operate air volume
A/C
adjustment knob on the air

soft key on the display to
adjust the air volume.
● With air conditioning off, turn
AC
on the air conditioning by air

volume adjustment knob on
the panel or air volume button
P
on the display.
When turning on the air
OMT15-5101
conditioning by increasing or
decreasing air volume, mode,
air volume and outside/
recirculated air mode are the
state before air conditioning is
turned off.
298
Temperature Adjustment Knob
● Operate temperature
adjustment knob on the air
soft key on the display to
adjust the temperature.
A/C

conditioning, temperature
damper will automatically stop
at the coldest position.
AC

OMT15-5102
Mode Switch
To select the airflow direction,

touch the mode switch. Air
conditioning system will work in
mode that the switch indicates.
A/C
For more operation methods,
refer to "Mode Switch"
(Automatic Air Conditioning
OMT15-5103
System) in this section.
299
A/C Switch
Press A/C switch to operate air

conditioning compressor, and A/
C switch indicator will come on at
the same time. Press A/C switch
A/C
again, air conditioning
compressor will stop operating
and indicator will go off.
OMT15-5104
refer to "A/C Switch" (Automatic
Air Conditioning System) in this
section.
Outside/Recirculated Air Mode Button
Press the outside/recirculated air

mode button to switch between
outside air and recirculated air
modes. Touch the switch,
A/C
corresponding mode indicator
will come on.
OMT15-5105
refer to "Outside/Recirculated Air
Mode Switch" (Automatic Air
Conditioning System) in this
section.
300
Precautions When Using Air Conditioning System
To extend the life span of the air conditioning system, when using the
A/C cooling function, please note the following:
● For the vehicle that parking for a long time in hot weather, please
do not turn on the air conditioning immediately after the engine is
started. You should open the windows first to let the hot air out,
wait until the inside temperature cools down, then close the
windows and turn on the air conditioning.
● Do not use the air conditioning for a long time when driving at low
speed.
● Turn off the air conditioning switch 2 to 3 minutes before parking
the vehicle to allow the blower to continue operating. As the
outside air temperature is very high, it is best to use the outside air
mode to eliminate temperature difference between A/C lines and
surroundings, keeping a comparatively dry air conditioning system 5
and preventing the accumulation of higher amounts of bacteria and

other contaminants.
301
5-3. Rear Window and Outside Rear View Mirror Defogger
To turn on the rear window

defroster or outside rear view
mirror defroster (if equipped), the
engine (ignition) switch should
be turned to ON mode. Pressing
rear window defroster switch will
turn on the defroster and the
P
OMT15-5073 indicator will come on. Press the

switch again to switch off the
defroster and the indicator will
also go off.
The system will automatically
shut off after the defoggers have
operated for about 15 minutes.
CAUTION
● Do not scratch or damage the heater wires when cleaning the rear window
or outside rear view mirror.
● Make sure that the defoggers are turned off after defogging or defrosting the
rear window or outside rear view mirror. Leaving defoggers on for a long
time could cause the battery to become depleted. The defoggers are not
designed for drying rain water or melting snow.
WARNING
Do not touch the rear window or outside rear view mirror when the defroster is
operating or has just turned off, to avoid scalding injury.
302
5-4. Rear View Mirror
Inside Rear View Mirror
Adjust inside rear view mirror to a

proper position before driving, to
enable driver to attain an optimum
rear view. When adjusting,
manually turn the inside rear view
mirror in the desired direction.
OMT15-5106
Day mode
Night mode
To reduce glare from headlights of
vehicles behind you during night
5
1 driving, you can pull glare-resistant
2 adjustment lever backwards to

OMT15-5107 adjust rear view angle.
303
Power Outside Rear View Mirror
Power outside rear view mirror

adjustment switch is located at
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
left side of driver side instrument
VOL
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
panel.
Rear view mirror angle can be
adjusted with rear view mirror
1 2 adjustment switch only when
engine (ignition) switch is turned
to ACC or ON position.
Adjust left outside rear view
mirror by moving center
adjustment switch to the left;
adjust right outside rear view
mirror by moving adjustment
OMT15-5108
switch to the right.
Touch arrow positions on
adjustment switch to adjust rear
view mirrors.
▲: Up
▼: Down
◄: Left
►: Right
304
WARNING
● Be sure to adjust outside rear view mirrors according to driver's position

before driving to make sure that driver can view conditions behind the vehicle.
● Do not adjust outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may lead to
mishandling of vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Image displayed on outside rear view mirrors may differ from actual, so
always drive carefully.
■ Folding and extending outside rear view mirrors

Manual folding
Hold outside rear view mirror by
hand and push it backwards
firmly, until it folds to its position.
Hold edge of outside rear view 5
mirror and pull up slightly, until it

OMT15-5109 extends to a proper position.
Automatic folding (if

equipped)
Manual operation: In ON mode,
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
VOL
press rear view mirror folding

switch, outside rear view mirror
will be folded automatically.
Remote controller operation:
press lock button on remote
controller or door handle switch
button, the vehicle enters
fortifying mode, and outside rear
view mirror folds down
automatically; press unlock
button on remote controller or
OMT15-5110
door handle switch button, the
305
vehicle enters fortifying

deactivation mode, and outside
rear view mirror extends
automatically.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface when folding and extending outside rear view mirrors,
to prevent surface from damage due to excessive force.
WARNING
● For outside rear view mirrors equipped with automatic fold and extend
functions, manual folding or extending is disabled. If folding or extending has
abnormalities, please contact a Chery authorized service station as soon as
possible.
● Do not fold outside rear view mirrors while driving.
● Be careful not to get your hand caught by a moving outside rear view mirror.
306
5-5. Wipers and Washer System
Windshield wiper and washer

MIST
OFF
AUTO
AUTO
ON
REAR
switch is located on right side of
steering column.
PULL LO OFF
HI
OMT15-5111
CAUTION
● In cold weather, you must check that the wiper blade is not frozen onto the
windshield before using the wipers, it cannot be used until the windshield is
unfrozen. Failure to do so may cause damage to the wiper motor.
● If there are obstacles on windshield, do not operate wipers. Failure to do so
may damage the wiper motor or scratch the windshield. Obstacles must be
cleared before operating wipers. 5
● Do not operate wipers when windshield is dry. Doing so may scratch glass

and damage wiper blades.
Front Wipers Operation Instructions
Following functions are available

MIST only when engine (ignition) switch
MIST
AUTO is in ON mode.
OFF ON
PULL
AUTO
LO OFF
REAR OFF
HI
AUTO/INT
LO
HI
OMT15-5112
■ Single wiping (MIST)

Pull wiper and washer switch upwards to "MIST" position and
release it. It will return to its original position. At this time, wipers
will stop after wiping once.
307
■ Auto wiping (AUTO) (for vehicles equipped with rain sensor)

Pull wiper and washer switch downwards to "AUTO" position, the
auto wiping mode will turn on automatically.
Wiper controls wiper speed
according to amount of raindrops.
To control wiper sensitivity
accurately, adjust the sensitivity
ON
MIST
OFF
AUTO
OFF
REAR
knob. Turn the knob upwards to
increase sensitivity, and turn it
PULL LO
HI
backwards to decrease
OMT15-5113 sensitivity.
■ Intermittent wiping (INT) (without rain sensor equipped)
Pull wiper and washer switch downwards to "INT" position, and
wipers will operate intermittently.
There are 4 intermittent gears, interval time is 13, 8, 2, 4 seconds
respectively.
■ Low speed wiping (LO)
Pull wiper and washer switch downwards to "LO" position, and
wipers will operate continuously at low speed.
■ High speed wiping (HI)
Pull wiper and washer switch downwards to "HI" position, and
wipers will operate continuously at high speed.
■ Stop wiping (OFF)
Pull wiper and washer switch downwards to OFF, and wipers will
operate automatically at low speed until return to stop position.
308
Front Washers Operation Instructions
Front washer nozzles are

located on upper part of hood.
OMT15-5114
With engine (ignition) switch in

ON mode, pull wiper and washer
switch towards the steering wheel
and hold it in this position, the
front wipers and washers will
5
operate simultaneously. Washers
will stop spraying after wiper and

OMT15-5115 washer switch is released, but
front wipers will return to their
original positions and stop
operating after wiping several
times.
CAUTION
● Do not operate washer for more than 10 seconds each time.

● Do not operate washer when there is no washer fluid in reservoir.
● Do not try to clear a nozzle with a pin or other objects when it becomes
blocked, or it will be damaged.
309
Rear Wiper Operation Instructions

ON mode, turn rear wiper switch
AUT
O
ON
REA
R
to "ON" mode, rear wiper will
MIST OFF
operate. Turn to "OFF" mode,

OFF
TO
AU
PUL
L LO
HI
rear wiper will turn off.
OMT15-5116
Rear Washer Operation Instructions
Rear washer nozzle is located on

upper part of rear window and
right of high mounted stoplight.
OMT15-5117

ON mode, rotate knob on wiper
AUT
O
ON
REA
R
and washer switch to " "
MIST OFF
position and hold it in this

OFF
TO
AU
PUL
L LO
HI
position, the rear wiper and

washer will operate
simultaneously.
OMT15-5118
310
CAUTION
● Do not operate washer for more than 10 seconds each time.

● Do not operate washer when there is no washer fluid in reservoir.
● Do not try to clear a nozzle with a pin or other objects when it becomes
blocked, or it will be damaged.
311
5-6. Seats
Front Seats
■ Power seat (only driver side) (if equipped)

Seat height adjustment
Pull up and down front end of
button to adjust seat height.
OMT15-5119
Seat position adjustment

Parallelly move button forwards
and backwards to adjust seat
position.
OMT15-5120
Seatback angle adjustment

Pull upper end of button forwards
and backwards to adjust the angle
of seatback.
OMT15-5121
312
Seat lumbar support

adjustment
Press up and down and front and
rear position on seat lumbar
support adjustment button to
adjust position of seat lumbar
support.
OMT15-5122
■ Manual seat
Seat height adjustment
Pull up and down seat
adjustment lever to adjust seat
height.
OMT15-5123

Seatback angle adjustment
Lean your body against seatback,
and then pull seatback adjustment
lever upwards, adjust seatback to
desired angle by changing tilt
angle of body. After that, move the
seatback forwards and backwards
OMT15-5124
to make sure the seatback is
locked in position.
313
Seat position adjustment

There is a grip under seat for
adjusting forward and backward
position of seat. Pull it up to adjust
forward and backward position of
seat. After adjusting seat to
desired position, release
OMT15-5125
adjustment lever, After that, move
the seat forwards and backwards
to make sure the seat is locked in
position.
WARNING
● Do not adjust seat while driving.

● Do not place any items under seat while moving it, otherwise, it may prevent
seat from moving.
● Avoid reclining seatback more than necessary. Seat belts provide maximum
protection in a frontal or rear collision when driver and front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in their seats.
● After adjusting seatback, lean your body against it to make sure seat is
locked in position.
314
Rear Seats
■ Fold-down rear seats

1. Adjust height of rear seat head
restraints. (Please refer to "Head
Restraints" in this section for
details.)
OMT15-5126
CAUTION
When folding down rear seats, make sure that the outer seat belt passes
through the seatback, to avoid damaging shoulder belts.
5
2. Stow rear seat belt buckles. (Please refer to "Stow Rear Seat Belt

Buckles" in section 3 for details.)
3. Pull right lock release lever
with one hand and push
forward upper side of
seatback with the other hand
until it is folded completely.
OMT15-5127
4. As same operation above, pull

left lock release lever and push
forward upper side of the
seatback until it is folded
completely.
OMT15-5128
315
CAUTION
The center and left seats are a unit.
Folding rear seatback can enlarge luggage compartment. Please

refer to "Luggage Stowage Precautions" in this section for
precautions when loading luggage.
Head Restraints
■ Adjusting height of head restraints

While pressing the lock release
1 button
Move head restraint upwards
2 Move head restraint
downwards
OMT15-5129
When adjusting head restraints,

make sure that the center of
head restraint is closest to the
top of your ears.
OMT15-5130
316
■ Removing or installing head restraint

To remove head restraint, press
lock release button and hold it
there until head restraints can be
pulled out completely.
OMT15-5131
To reinstall head restraint, align head restraint with installation holes

and push down head restraint to lock position.
WARNING
● Always adjust head restraints to correct position.

● After adjusting head restraints, push them down and make sure they are
5
locked in position.
● Do not drive vehicle with head restraints removed.
317
5-7. Seat Heater (if equipped)
Seat heater switches are located

1 2
in front of shift lever.
Driver's seat heater switch
Front passenger's seat heater
switch
OMT15-5132
Seat heaters only operate when engine (ignition) switch is in ACC or

ON mode.
When switches are pressed, seat cushion and seatback can be
heated at the same time.
Heat with high temperature
Press the switch once to heat
with high temperature, and both
indicators come on.
Heat with low temperature
Press the switch twice to heat
OMT15-5133
with low temperature, and one
indicator comes on.
Turn off: if indicators do not come on while pressing the switch third
time, seat heater is turned off.
WARNING
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, elderly persons, sick persons or persons
with physical disabilities
● Persons who have sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
318
CAUTION
● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on seats and do not
stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into seat.
● Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner benzene, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) when cleaning the seat. Failure to do so may cause damage to seat
heater and seat surface.
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using seat
heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of seat and may
lead to overheating.
● To prevent battery from discharging, do not turn on seat heaters more than
necessary when engine is not running.
319
5-8. Lights
Headlight Combination Switch
Headlight combination switch is

3
located in left side of steering
column.
2
1
AUTO
OFF
turned to ON mode, rotate
OFF
headlight combination switch to
turn on following lights:
OMT15-5134
"AUTO" position (if equipped)

Control on and off of low beam lights and position lights by sensing
intensity of outside light automatically.
" " position
Front position lights, rear position lights, license plate lights and
backlights come on, and " " indicator on instrument cluster
comes on.
" " position
Headlight low beams and position lights come on.
320
■ Turning on headlight high beam

Headlight high beam
For high beam, turn headlights on
and push headlight combination
AUTO
OFF
OFF
RES/-
switch away from steering wheel,

SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE SRSG
AIRBA
VOL
headlight " " on instrument

cluster comes on at this time.
OMT15-5135 To turn off high beam, pull

headlight combination switch
back.
Flashing headlight high beam

Pull headlight combination switch
towards steering wheel and
release it. Headlight high beam
RES/-
SET/-
ON/OFF
MODE SRSG
AIRBA
5
flashes once and headlight high
VOL
beam indicator on instrument

cluster flashes once
OMT15-5136
simultaneously.
You can flash headlight high
beam with headlights on or off.
CAUTION
If parking vehicle for a long time, make sure headlight combination switch is
turned off to avoid discharging battery, and this may result in the vehicle not
being able to start.
321
■ Follow me home function

Manual mode (without automatic headlight)
1. Turn the engine (ignition) switch from ON mode to OFF mode.
2. Activate the headlight flashing switch within 2 minutes. low
beam lights and position lights will come on.
Each time follow me home function is activated, position lights
and headlight low beams come on for 30 seconds. Follow me
home function can be activated continuously a maximum of 8
times.
After activating follow me home

function, the corresponding
04:02 20°C information will display on the
0 display.
km/h
I.F.C. Trip
8.9 L/100km Follow Me Lighting 30s 259 km
999999 km
C H P E F
x1000
km/h rpm
OMT15-5137
3. To cancel follow me home function, pull headlight combination

switch upwards and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Automatic mode (with automatic headlight)
1. Turn the engine (ignition) switch from ON mode to OFF mode.
2. When headlight combination switch is in AUTO position, lock
button on remote controller is pressed and vehicle is in a dark
area, low beam lights and position lights will come on
automatically for 30 seconds.
3. To cancel follow me home function, turn engine (ignition) switch
to OFF/ON/ACC mode or headlight combination switch is not at
AUTO position.
322
■ Lead me to car function

Manual mode (without automatic headlight)
LMC function is turned on when the following conditions are met:
● engine (ignition) switch is in OFF mode; FMH is activated in
same ignition cycle and turns off automatically due to time out; 4
doors are in closed position; receives remote control unlock
signal.
● When LMC function activates: low beam lights and position
lights will come on for a maximum of 60 seconds. After time out,
LMC function will turn off automatically, headlight low beams and
position lights also turn off.
● After receiving remote control unlock signal again, delay time of
LMC function is 60 seconds (Timing begins when receiving
remote control unlock signal).
LMC function is turned off when the following conditions are met: 5
● When LMC function activates: receives remote control lock

signal (4 doors are in closed position); any door is opened;
engine (ignition) switch is turned to ACC or IGN ON, LMC
function turns off and low beam lights and position lights also
turn off.
Automatic mode (with automatic headlight)
LMC function is turned on when the following conditions are met:
● Engine (ignition) switch is in off mode; headlight combination
switch is in AUTO position; 4 doors are in closed position; unlock
button on remote controller is pressed and vehicle is in a dark
area.
LMC function is turned off when the following conditions are met:
● When LMC function activates: after 30 seconds or engine
(ignition) switch is turned to ACC, LMC function turns off and low
beam lights and position lights also turn off.
323
● When LMC function activates, if activation conditions are

available again or follow me home function is activated, re-
timing for 30 seconds, and lights do not flash.
Turn signal lights
Turn signal lights operate only

Right
AUTO
OFF
in ON mode.
OFF
RES/-
Pull up: Right turn signal lights

SET/-
ON/OFF
Left VOL
MODE SRSG
AIRBA
come on.
Push down: Left turn signal lights
OMT15-5138 come on.
Turn signal indicator on instrument cluster flashes when turn signal

lights are on. Combination switch automatically returns to its center
position after cornering.
Lane change assist function (if equipped)
Operation conditions of left lane change assist:
● IGN ON; pull left turn signal light switch slightly (50 ms ~ 1000 ms),
left turn signal lights will flash 3 times.
● During left lane change is performed, pull left turn signal light
switch slightly (50 ms ~ 1000 ms) again, left turn signal lights will
flash 3 times.
● When left lane change is performed, left turn signal light switch
remains active (>1000 ms), switch to left turn signal lights
operating logic automatically.
Operation stop conditions of left lane change assist:
● After turn signal lights flash 3 times or engine (ignition) switch is
turned from IGN ON to ACC or OFF mode, left turn signal lights
stop flashing.
324
CAUTION
If turn signal indicator on instrument cluster flashes faster than usual, a front or
rear turn signal light bulb may be burnt out.
Daytime Running Lights
After starting engine, daytime

running lights come on
automatically, " " on
instrument cluster comes on
simultaneously.
When headlights and headlight
high beam are turned on,
OMT15-5139
daytime running lights will go off. 5
Fog Lights

■ Front fog lights
Turn headlight combination
switch to " ", " " or
AUTO
OFF
OFF
"AUTO" position with engine
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
(ignition) switch in ON mode,

turn fog light knob to " "
MODE SRSG
AIRBA
VOL
position to turn on front fog lights

and front fog light indicator on
OMT15-5140 instrument cluster illuminates
simultaneously.
To turn off front fog lights, turn
fog light knob to "OFF" position.
325
■ Assist steering illumination (if equipped) (take left side as an

example)
Assist steering illumination function of fog light is turned on when
the following conditions are met:
● Engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode; turn signal lights turn on
or steering column is turned over 45 degrees; low beam lights
turn on; vehicle speed is less than 40 km/h.
Assist steering illumination function of fog light is turned off when
the following conditions are met:
● Engine (ignition) switch is in OFF or ACC mode; turn signal
lights turn off or steering column is turned below 10 degrees; low
beam lights turn off; vehicle speed is more than 40 km/h.
● When assist steering illumination function of fog light is
activated, indicator on instrument cluster will not activate.
■ Rear fog lights
Turn headlight combination
switch to " " or " " with
AUTO
OFF
OFF
engine (ignition) switch in ON
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
position. Turn fog light knob to

" " position to turn on the rear
MODE SRSG
AIRBA
VOL
fog lights and rear fog light

indicator on instrument cluster
OMT15-5141 illuminates simultaneously.
To turn off rear fog lights, turn
knob to " " or "OFF" position
again.
CAUTION
● After headlight combination switch is turned to OFF position, front and rear
fog lights will go off automatically. Turn on headlight combination switch
again, only front frog lights come on.
● The fog lights should be used properly in accordance with traffic laws.
326
Headlight Leveling
Headlight leveling dial is located

3 1
at left side of instrument panel of
2 driver side.
SET/-
RES/-
1
Raise level of headlight beam
ON/OFF
VOL
MODE
SRS
AIRBAG
O
2
Lower level of headlights beam
OMT15-5142
The headlight leveling dial includes 4 positions: 0, 1, 2 and 3.

The level of headlight is adjusted according to number of passengers
and loading condition of vehicle.
Headlight leveling dial setting guidelines are listed in the table below.
Number of Passengers and Loading Condition of Vehicle 5
Dial Position
Occupants Luggage Load

Driver None 0
Driver and front passenger None 0
All seats occupied None 1

All seats occupied Full luggage loading 2
Driver Full luggage loading 3
327
Interior Lights
Rotate the switch to " "

position, lights will be turned
off.
Door switch: rotate the switch
to " " position, conditions of
turning on as follows:
1 3
2
OMT15-5143
● When any door is opened, interior lights come on for 3 minutes,

if any door (except back door) is opened during 3 minutes, time
of lighting ON will be extended.
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ACC or OFF mode and all
door are closed, lights come on for 10 seconds, and then go off.
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode and all door are
closed, lights go off after a delay for 3 seconds.
● When pressing unlock button on smart key， lights come on for

15 seconds, and then go off.
● When engine (ignition) switch is in ON mode and collision
information is received from body control module, lights come on
for 30 minutes, and then go off.
Reading position: rotate switch to " " , light comes on.
328
Front Doorsill Light (if equipped)
When front doors are opened,

the light comes on.
VOL
MODE SRS
AIRBAG
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
When front doors are closed, the

light goes off.
With front doors are opened,
battery-saving function will turn
OMT15-5144 off front doorsill light after 3
minutes to prevent battery from
depleting. Open other doors
during this time, restart to timing.
Courtesy Light (if equipped)

5
When front doors are opened, the

VOL
MODE SRS
AIRBAG
SET/-
ON/OFF
RES/-
light comes on.
When front doors are closed, the
light goes off.
With front doors are opened,
battery-saving function will turn off
OMT15-5145 courtesy light after 40 seconds to
prevent battery from depleting.
329
Luggage Compartment Light
When back door are opened, the

light comes on. When back door
are closed, the light goes off
automatically.
If back door remains open, the
light goes off automatically after
15 minutes.
OMT15-5148
330
5-9. Power Outlet
Power outlet is located at the lower

left side of instrument panel glove
12
V box.
The power outlet is designed to
supply power for vehicle
accessories.
OMT15-5149 Power outlet can be used no

matter engine (ignition) switch
turns on or off.
CAUTION
● To prevent the fuse from being blown, power load should not exceed the
vehicle total capacitance of 12 V.
● To prevent the battery is discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than
necessary when the engine is not running. 5
● Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate plug to power outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.
331
5-10.Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray
■ Cigarette lighter
Cigarette lighter is located in
1
armrest box.
To use cigarette lighter, press the
cigarette lighter down after
2
engine (ignition) switch is turned
to ACC or ON mode. After
heating up, it will automatically
OMT15-5150
pop up to be ready for use.
WARNING
■ To prevent burns or fires

● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not press the cigarette lighter down and hold it, doing so may cause it
to overheat, resulting in a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into this outlet. Doing
so may deform the outlet, making the cigarette lighter unusable or difficult
to take out.
■ Ashtray
Ashtray is located near the cup
holder.
OMT15-5151
332
WARNING
■ When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed completely when not in use. Otherwise, in the event
of sudden braking, the cigarette ends and ash may be thrown out, causing
injury.
■ To prevent fire
● Do not smoke during driving.
● Fully extinguish the cigarette ends after smoking to prevent a fire.
● Do not place paper or any other inflammables into the ashtray.
333
5-11.Cup Holders
Front cup holder

Front cup holders are close to
parking brake lever.
P
NE
N
GI T
EN AROP
D
ST
ST
L
OMT15-5152
Rear cup holder (if equipped)

Rear cup holders are located on
rear center seatback.
OMT15-5153
WARNING
● Do not place anything other than cups or drink cans in cup holders to
prevent these items being thrown out of the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking, causing injury.
● Cover the cup or drink can firmly to prevent water or drinks from spraying
out.
334
5-12.Sun Visors and Vanity Mirrors
1 2 3 4
Driver vanity mirror
Driver side sun visor
Front passenger side sun
visor
Front passenger side vanity
mirror
Flip the sun visor down to use
OMT15-5154
the vanity mirror.
Driver vanity mirror light

Push the vanity mirror lid towards
right, vanity mirror light will turn on.
5
OMT15-5176

Front passenger side vanity mirror
light (if equipped)
Push the vanity mirror lid towards
left, vanity mirror light will turn on.
OMT15-5177
Flip the sun visor down.

Detach the hook and turn
1
outward to block out sidelight.
2
OMT15-5155
335
5-13. Assist Grips and Rear Center Armrest
■ Assist grips
Assist grips are installed above
front passenger door and both
rear passenger doors
respectively. When traveling on
rough roads, passengers can
keep balance by grasping the
grips to ensure safety.
OMT15-5156
■ Rear center armrest (if equipped)

Rear center seat is equipped with
a fold-down armrest with cup
holders.
Flip the armrest down for use.
Please return the center armrest
to its original position when not in
OMT15-5157 use.
336
5-14.Panoramic Moon Roof (if equipped)
When engine (ignition) switch is turned to ACC or ON mode,

overhead switch can be used to open/close moon roof and
sunshade, and tilt up/down the moon roof.
■ Opening and closing
● Opening the moon roof

Manual mode: Lightly press and
hold switch " ", the moon roof
will open to a proper position;
Release the button to continue to
open it; Lightly press the switch
1 2
OMT15-5158
again, the moon roof will open
fully. Release the switch, it will
stop moving. 5
Auto mode*: Press the switch " "

firmly, moon roof will slide to a
proper position automatically;
Press the switch again, it will open
fully.
● Closing the moon roof
Manual mode: Lightly press and hold switch " " to close the moon
roof. Moon roof stops moving when releasing the switch. If you want
to continue to close, press and hole the switch again.
Auto mode*: Press the switch " " firmly, moon roof will move to full
open position.
*: To stop the moon roof halfway, lightly press either button on the
moon roof switch.
CAUTION
When sunshade is in close state, press any button of moon roof to open the
sunshade to center position.
337
■ Tilting up and down
● Tilting the moon roof up

Sunshade is not open: Lightly
press switch " ", sunshade will
open to center position
automatically; Press again, moon
roof tilts up; Press switch firmly,
2 1
OMT15-5159
sunshade will open to center
position automatically and moon
roof tilts up.
Sunshade is open: when moon
roof is fully closed, press the
switch, the moon roof will tilt up.
● Tilting the moon roof down
When moon roof glass tilts up, press switch " ", moon roof glass will
tilt down to close.
CAUTION
Moon roof only has automatic function in tilted area, it can not be interrupted
during tilting, and it can not stop in any position when tilting.
338
■ Sunshade
● Opening the sunshade

Manual mode: Lightly press and
hold switch " ", the sunshade
will slide to open to the center
position; If you want to continue
to open it, release the button and
1 2
OMT15-5160
then press and hole it again.
Release the switch, it will stop
moving.
Auto mode*: Press the switch
firmly, sunshade will slide to the
center position automatically.
Press the switch firmly again, it
will move to full open position. 5
● Closing the sunshade

Manual mode: Lightly press and hold switch " ", the sunshade will
slide to close to the center position; If you want to continue to close it,
release the button and then press it again. Release the switch, it will
stop moving.
Auto mode*: Press the switch firmly, sunshade will slide to the center
position automatically; Press the switch again, it will move to full
close position.
*： To stop the sunshade halfway, lightly press either side of
sunshade switch.
339
■ Jam protection function

While moon roof closing and tilting down, if an object is detected
between the moon roof and the frame, the moon roof will return
automatically; While sunshade closing, if an object is detected
between the sunshade and the roof, the sunshade will return
automatically.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Or it may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle
while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
● Check that all the passengers do not have any part of their body in a position
where it could be caught when operating moon roof.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. If someone gets caught
when closing moon roof, it may result in death or serious injury.
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
● Jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
340
5-15.Storage Space
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the

handle.
OMT15-5161
WARNING
● Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an
open glove box or the items stored inside.
5
● Do not store oversize or hard objects in glove box, to prevent these items
being thrown out in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing

injury.
Center Console Storage Box
Pull the lid up to open.
OMT15-5162
341
Storage Box (without Seat Heating)
Storage box is located in front

end of shift lever.
OMT15-5178
Storage Box Tray
Storage box tray is located

beside the back-up power outlet.
OMT15-5163
Card Slots
SET/-
RES/-
Card slots are located at the
lower part of the outside rear
ON/OFF
S
MODE SR AG
AIRB
view mirror adjustment switch

VOL
panel.
OMT15-5164
342
Door Storage Boxes
Door storage boxes on front and rear doors can be used for storing
maps, manual and other items.
Front door storage boxes
OMT15-5165
Rear door storage boxes

OMT15-5166
CAUTION
■ When using a door storage box as a cup holder

● When storing a bottle, close the cap. Do not place an open bottle and a
glass or a paper cup containing liquid in the storage boxes. Or liquid inside
may spill and glass may break.
● Some bottles may not be stored depending on size or shape.
● Do not place oversize objects in the door storage boxes.
343
Seat Storage Bag
Front seatbacks are both

equipped with pockets storage
bags on backside, which are
used to store documents,
manual etc.
OMT15-5167
Glasses Box
Glasses box is near front interior

light closely.
OMT15-5168
Ticket Holder
Ticket holder is located on sun

visor, and it can be used to store
tickets, etc.
OMT15-5169
344
Luggage Compartment
Split-folding rear seats provide convenience for storage of cargo. The

seatbacks can be easily folded down. While folding the seats,
continuous, flat-like and extending cargo back panel is provided.
Please refer to the "Rear Seats" in this section for details.
■ Luggage cover
When small size items are stowed inside the luggage compartment,
the luggage cover will prevent the items from flying up during sudden
braking, protecting the driver and passengers.
When larger items are stowed, the luggage cover can be removed to
enlarge storage space.
1. Remove the hook to put down
the luggage cover.
5

OMT15-5170
2. Detach the slot to remove

luggage cover.
OMT15-5171
345
Luggage Compartment Storage Boxes
They are located in both sides of

luggage compartment.
OMT15-5172
Roof Carrier (if equipped)
Roof carrier is used for loading

cargo. It is not designed to
provide extra vehicle load
capacity. Be sure that the total
occupant weight and luggage
load inside the vehicle, plus the
load on the roof carrier, does not
OMT15-5173 exceed the maximum vehicle
load capacity.
Fixing hook
They are located in both sides of

luggage compartment, and used
for securing objects which easily
falls down.
OMT15-5174
346
CAUTION
● Do not overload the vehicle.

● When placing cargo, make sure its weight is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo, never allow its length or width to exceed that of
the vehicle.
● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof carrier.
● Be careful not to scratch the roof surface. Place blanket or other protective
items between cargo and roof if necessary.
WARNING
● Do not load unevenly. Improperly loading may cause deterioration of

steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof carrier will make vehicle gravity center higher. 5
Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt

maneuvers, otherwise it may result in vehicle out of control or rollover due to
improper operation.
347
Luggage Stowage Precautions
When stowing luggage in the vehicle, observe the following precautions:

● To enlarge space for stowing luggage, the rear seats can be folded
when no passenger in seats (Refer to "Rear Seats" in this section for
folding procedures).
● Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded weight.
● Make sure that the stowing items are not oversize to prevent the back
door from closing properly.
WARNING
● Do not stack goods or luggage higher than the seat back. Keep them low, as
close to the floor as possible to prevent them sliding forward in event of
braking, causing personal injury.
● Do not allow anyone to sit in the luggage compartment. The passengers
should sit in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise,
they are much more likely to suffer serious injury in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
● Do not place anything on the top of the luggage cover. Such items may be
thrown off and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or
an accident. Secure all items in a safe place firmly.
● Do not drive with the back door open or not closed fully, to prevent items
from being thrown out to cause personal injury.
348
Section 6
IN CASE OF AN
EMERGENCY
6-1. Hazard Light ..................... 350 6-5. If Your Vehicle Needs to

be Towed ...................... 364
6-2. If You have a Flat Tire Towing Precautions .......... 364
When Driving .................351 Emergency Towing ........... 366
Required Tools and Spare Installing Towing Eyelet .... 368
Tire................................ 352
Preparation for Jacking 6-6. Removing and Installing
Up Vehicle .................... 353 Battery ........................... 370
Tire Replacement ............. 353
6-7. If Your Vehicle cannot
6-3. If Your Vehicle Start Normally ............... 372
Overheats...................... 360 Simple Checks.................. 372
Starting a Flooded
6-4. Replacing Fuses ............... 362 Engine........................... 372
6-8. Jump-starting .................... 374

Jump-starting
Procedures.................... 375
349
Section 6. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
6-1. Hazard Light
If you stop vehicle at a place that could cause a traffic accident, turn
on hazard lights to warn other vehicle drivers. Stop vehicle at a place
as far away from the road as possible.
Hazard light switch is located

above the air conditioning control
panel.
OMT15-6000
Press the switch to turn on the hazard lights, and all turn signal lights
and turn indicator on instrument cluster flash at the same time. Press
the switch again to turn the lights off.
Turn signal light switch does not work when hazard lights flash.
When ignition switch is turned off, hazard lights still can be operated.
When brake pedal is depressed in an emergency with vehicle speed
in medium-high range, all the external turn signal lights and turn
indicator on instrument cluster flash quickly. When brake pedal is
released, hazard light switch is pressed or engine (ignition) switch is
switched to OFF position, the external turn signal lights stop flashing.
CAUTION
● Only use hazard lights in an emergency.

● To prevent battery from being discharged, do not turn on the hazard lights
more than necessary when engine is not running.
350
6-2. If You have a Flat Tire When Driving
1. If a tire goes flat during driving, slow down the vehicle gradually
and keep a straight driving. Stop vehicle to a safe place away from
the traffic road. Park it on firm and level ground as much as
possible. Avoid stopping on center or divider of a highway.
2. Apply parking brake and shift the shift lever to P position (for DCT/
CVT model) or N position (for MT model).
3. Stop engine and turn on the hazard light.
4. Have everyone get out of vehicle and stand on the side away from
traffic.
5. Take out warning triangle, and
place it more than 50 m
Mor behind the vehicle.
e th
an 5
0m
OMT15-6010
CAUTION 6
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
● Place warning triangle at a distance of more than 50 m from the vehicle in
direction of coming vehicles on a normal road; more than 150 m on the
highway; more than 150 m on a rainy day or at a corner, so as to allow
vehicles behind notice the triangle as early as possible.
● Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a
flat tire can damage the tire beyond repair.
351
Required Tools and Spare Tire
In emergency, it may necessary to repair your vehicle by yourself, so

you have to be familiar with the usage of tools provided with your
vehicle before operation.
OMT15-6020
Warning triangle Tools

Spare tire
Push warning triangle backward to

remove it.
OMT15-6050
352
Jack
4
Wheel bolt wrench
1 2
3 Jack rocker
Towing eyelet
OMT15-6030
Preparation for Jacking Up Vehicle
1. Use jack on a firm level ground.

2. It is recommended to chock the vehicle wheels and no persons
remain in the vehicle that is being jacked.
3. Never allow anyone put their bodies under the vehicle that is being
jacked with jack.
Tire Replacement
1. Take out the spare tire. 6
Open back door, turn over the
luggage compartment carpet and
take out the tool base. Rotate
fixing bolt of spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it,
and then take out spare tire.
OMT15-6041
353
2. Place a wheel block.

When jacking up vehicle, you
must put a block under the tire
diagonally opposite to the tire
being removed to prevent
wheels from rolling.
OMT15-6060
Flat Tire Wheel Chock Position

Front left wheel Behind rear right wheel
Front right wheel Behind rear left wheel
Rear left wheel In front of front right wheel
Rear right wheel In front of front left wheel
3. Loosen all wheel bolts.

Before jacking up vehicle, use
wheel bolt wrench to loosen
each bolt on the wheel which
needs to be replaced
counterclockwise.
To get the maximum torque, fit
wheel bolt wrench to the bolt so
OMT15-6070 that the handle is set on right
side, then grasp the end of
wrench handle and pull it upward
as shown in illustration.
CAUTION
● Do not let wheel bolt wrench slip off the bolt.

● Do not remove bolts, and just unscrew them about one-half turn.
354
4. Position jack on a level and firm ground, and make notch of jack at
the correct jacking-up point.
Turn jack handle clockwise by
hand until notch of jack contacts
with the vehicle jacking-up point.
OMT15-6080
WARNING
When jacking up vehicle, always observe the followings:

● Jack is only to be used for tire replacement.
● Do not start or run engine when jacking up vehicle.
● Make sure that jack is set at the correct jacking-up point. Failure to do so
may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.
● When jacking up vehicle, do not place any objects on or under the jack. 6
● Never use more than one jack simultaneously.
355
5. Jack up vehicle after making sure that no passenger is in vehicle.

When jacking up vehicle, fit jack
rocker into jack, and wheel bolt
wrench into jack rocker. Turn the
wheel bolt wrench clockwise. As
jack contacts with vehicle and
begins to lift, check that jack is
properly positioned again.
OMT15-6090
WARNING
● Never put any part of your body under the vehicle when vehicle is jacked up
to avoid personal injury.
● Jack the vehicle to a proper height at which tire can be replaced.
● Working load limit of jack is 1000 kg.
6. Remove the wheel to be replaced.

Using wheel bolt wrench, remove
5 wheel bolts counterclockwise,
and then remove the wheel.
When resting wheel on ground,
place wheel so that wheel design
face up, to avoid scratching wheel
surface.
OMT15-6100
356
7. Install the spare tire.

a. Before installing wheel,
remove any attachments from
mounting surfaces with tools.
Make sure wheel hub is well
contact with wheel surface.
Otherwise, it may cause wheel
bolts to loosen and eventually
OMT15-6110 cause a serious accident.
b. Install spare tire on wheel hub.
OMT15-6120
8. Install the wheel bolts.

6
Screw in 5 wheel bolts clockwise
with hand first when installing
wheel bolts. Then straighten the
wheel and pretighten all bolts with
wheel bolt wrench.
OMT15-6121
CAUTION
Do not apply oil or grease on wheel bolts. If there is oil stain on bolt, clean the
bolt before installation.
357
9. Lower vehicle completely and tighten each wheel bolt.

Turn wheel bolt wrench counter
clockwise to lower vehicle.
OMT15-6091
Using wheel bolt wrench, tighten

bolts in sequence shown in
illustration. Repeat the process 2
3 1 to 3 times to make sure that
5 4 wheel bolts are tightened in
2
place.
Only use wheel bolt wrench to
OMT15-6071
tighten the bolts.
WARNING
● Before lowering vehicle, make sure that you and all other persons around
the vehicle stay in a safe area to prevent unexpected accident during vehicle
lowering.
● Driving slowly to the nearest service station and have wheel bolts tightened to
130 ± 10 N·m after replacing wheel. Otherwise, bolts may come loose and
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.
10. Stowing the flat tire.

11. Collect jack, warning triangle and all tools, and stow them in
original locations.
358
12. Check tire inflation pressure for replaced tire.

If pressure is lower than the specified value, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and inflate tire to the proper pressure. Do
not forget to reinstall tire valve cap, otherwise, dirt and moisture
could get into valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If cap is
missing, replace it with a new one as soon as possible.
WARNING
● When a tire other than the full-size spare tire is used, please drive by follow-
ing the limit speed.
● The tire other than full-size spare tire cannot be used for a long time, please
go to the nearest service station to replace it with a standard tire after use.
359
6-3. If Your Vehicle Overheats
If engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating and high

engine coolant temperature warning light comes on, it indicates that
the engine is overheating.
You should follow the procedures below:

1. Drive safely off the road and stop vehicle in a safe area, apply
parking brake and shift the shift lever to P position (for DCT/CVT
model) or N position (for MT model), and then turn on the hazard
lights. Turn off air conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam sprays out from coolant reservoir, stop the
engine immediately. Wait until steam subsides before opening
hood. If there is no coolant or steam sprays out, leave the engine
idling and check if cooling fan is operating.
If cooling fan does not operate,
turn off engine immediately, and
contact the Chery authorized
service station to check the
cooling system.
OMT15-9904
WARNING
● Escaping steam or coolant is a sign of
very high pressure in cooling system.
To avoid personal injury, never open the
hood until there is no steam spraying
out.
● Never attempt to open the coolant res-
OMT15-9905 ervoir cap when engine and radiator
are hot. Serious scalding injury will be
caused by hot coolant and steam blown
out under pressure.
360
3. Open hood, check that radiator, hoses and underneath of the

vehicle have no obvious coolant leakage. However, water dripping
from air conditioning after use is normal.
WARNING
When engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from moving fan and
engine drive belt. Even if engine has been turned off, fan may still run.
4. If coolant leakage is found, stop engine immediately, and contact

the Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair as
soon as possible.
5. If there are no obvious leaks,
open coolant reservoir cap
and check if coolant level in it
is low. If the level is low, add
MAX
MIN
coolant to a proper level. Only

use the coolant type
recommended by Chery.
OMT15-9906
6
CAUTION
● In emergency, water can be used temporarily if coolant is unavailable.

● If engine overheats frequently, please contact the Chery authorized service
station for the cooling system inspection and repair.
361
6-4. Replacing Fuses
Fuses are used to protect electrical circuits and appliances from

overload. If any of electrical appliances does not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace fuses as necessary.
1. Turn off all electrical equipment and the engine (ignition) switch.
2. Open fuse box cover and remove suspected fuse (for type A fuse,
use a pull-out tool).
3. Check if fuse is blown. If you are not sure whether fuse has blown,
try to replace the suspected fuse with one that is known good.
Type A Fuse
1 2
Good Blown
OMT15-6160
Type A Fuse
1 2
Good Blown
OMT15-6170
4. Only install a fuse that has the same amperage rating as the used
one. You can see amperage rating on the fuse and fuse box cover.
For fuse and relay layout, please refer to "Engine Compartment
Fuse and Relay Box" and "Instrument Panel Fuse and Relay Box"
in section 8.
362
If a spare fuse is unavailable, you can use a fuse with same

specification from other unimportant electrical appliances in an
emergency (such as radio and cigarette lighter).
It is better to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in
vehicle for emergency use.
CAUTION
● Turn off all electrical equipment and the engine (ignition) switch before
replacing any fuse.
● Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, otherwise, the electrical
appliances may overload. If the fuse with specified amperage rating is still
blown, it indicates that the circuit has a problem. Please contact the Chery
authorized service station for inspection and repair as soon as possible.
● Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary replacement.
Otherwise, this may cause serious damage to electrical appliances, or even
fire.
● Do not modify fuse or fuse box.
363
6-5. If Your Vehicle Needs to be Towed
Towing Precautions
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/
provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on ground must be in
good condition. If they are damaged, use a flatbed truck.
Followings are correct towing methods:
● Towing with a wheel lift-type

truck.
OMT15-6180
CAUTION
● After lifting wheels, it is necessary to fix the lifted wheels with safety chain or
equivalent tool.
● Before towing, release the parking brake and set the shift level to N position.
● Ensure that there is a proper clearance between the wheels not lifted and
ground. Otherwise, bumper and underbody of the towed vehicle will be
damaged during towing.
● Towing from front of the

vehicle with a towing dolly
under the rear wheels.
OMT15-6190
364
● Towing from rear of the vehicle

with a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
OMT15-6200
Following are wrong towing methods:
● Towing with sling-type truck

sling from front of the vehicle.
OMT15-6220
● Towing with sling-type truck 6

sling from rear of the vehicle
whilst front wheels are on the
ground.
OMT15-6230
● Towing with wheel lift-type

truck sling from rear of the
vehicle whilst front wheels are
on the ground.
OMT15-6240
365
CAUTION
Do not tow with sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. Otherwise,
vehicle body may be damaged.
Emergency Towing
If tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a towing cable, chain or lever secured to the
emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme caution when towing a
vehicle. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced road for
short distances at low speed. Driver must be in towed vehicle to
operate steering wheel and brake pedal. Wheels, drive train, axle,
steering wheel and brakes must be in good condition.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Set the shift lever to "N" position.
3. Engine (ignition) switch must be turned to ACC or ON mode.
CAUTION
● Before emergency towing, make sure that wheels, axle, drive train, steering
wheel and brakes are in good condition.
● Secure a towing cable, chain or lever to the vehicle towing eyelet.
● Tow vehicle as straight ahead as possible. Do not tow vehicle from side to
avoid damaging vehicle.
● If engine is not running, vacuum booster and power steering system will not
operate. Therefore, steering and braking will be more difficult than usual.
Operate carefully when towing.
● If towed vehicle still cannot move, do not forcibly towing to avoid secondary
damage to vehicle. Contact the Chery authorized service station or a
commercial towing service for assistance as soon as possible.
366
WARNING
● When towing vehicle, avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which
would apply excessive force on the towing eyelet, cable, chain or lever.
Doing so may cause towing eyelet, cable, chain or lever to break and cause
vehicle damage or serious personal injury.
● To avoid personal injury, people other than driver should stay away from the
vehicle when it is towed.
● Do not tow vehicle (CVT/DCT model) for long periods of time.
367
Installing Towing Eyelet
■ Front installation position of towing eyelet
OMT15-6260
Front installation position of towing eyelet is located on front right

side of the vehicle.
1. Use a screwdriver with its tip taped to remove the towing eyelet
hole cover.
2. Install towing eyelet into eyelet hole in a clockwise direction.
Then tighten it firmly with wheel bolt wrench.
368
■ Rear installation position of towing eyelet
OMT15-6270
Rear installation position of towing eyelet is located on rear right

side of the vehicle.
1. Use a screwdriver with its tip taped to remove the towing eyelet
hole cover.
2. Install towing eyelet into eyelet hole in a clockwise direction.
Then tighten it firmly with wheel bolt wrench. 6
CAUTION
Only use specified towing eyelet. Otherwise, vehicle may be damaged.
WARNING
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. Otherwise, the towing eyelet
may come loose when towing, which may cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
369
6-6. Removing and Installing Battery
Following steps must be taken when removing and installing battery:

1. Turn off all electrical equipment and the engine (ignition) switch.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the negative (-)
1
3 battery cable (1).
4. Remove the positive (+)
battery cable (2).
5. Remove battery holddown (3),
2 and remove battery.
OMT15-9907
CAUTION
Please operate carefully to avoid metal tool contacting both electrodes of the
battery at the same time or touching battery positive and vehicle body at the
same time.
6. Install a new battery that has the same specification as the used
one. Install battery into place in the reverse order of removal.
Used battery contains sulfuric acid and lead and should not be disposed of at
will. Please handle it according to local laws and regulations or discard it at a
local qualified waste disposal station.
370
WARNING
● Do not lean the battery. Always wear gloves and safety glasses during
operation, as battery acid is strongly corrosive.
● Prevent your skin and clothes from coming into contact with acid. If acid
spills on your skin or clothes, the liquid must be neutralized with alkaline
water (soap), and then wash it with clean water. Get emergency medical
attention immediately if necessary.
● Do not leave battery within the reach of children.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the
battery.
371
6-7. If Your Vehicle cannot Start Normally
Simple Checks
If engine will not start, make sure you have followed the correct
starting procedures given in "Normal Starting Procedure" in section 4
and check for sufficient fuel.
■ If engine does not run or engine speed is low
1. Check that battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If battery terminals are connected properly, turn on and observe
the headlights, if the light is dim, battery is discharged, and you
may try jump starting. If engine still cannot start, the starting
system may be malfunctioning. Please contact the Chery
authorized service station for inspection and repair as soon as
possible.
■ If engine runs at normal speed but will not start
1. Turn engine (ignition) switch to OFF or ACC mode and try
starting engine again.
2. If engine cannot be started, engine may be flooded due to
repeat starting. Try procedures in "Starting a Flooded Engine".
3. If engine still cannot start, other malfunctions occur in vehicle.
Please contact the Chery authorized service station for
inspection and repair as soon as possible.
Starting a Flooded Engine
If engine cannot be started, engine may be flooded due to repeat

starting.
For CVT/DCT model:
Follow the correct starting procedures to restart engine. Please refer
to "Normal Starting Procedure" in section 4.
For MT model:
Turn off engine (ignition) switch, and retry after several minutes.
If engine will not start after retry, please contact the Chery authorized
service station for inspection and repair as soon as possible.
372
CAUTION
● To avoid damage to starter, one starting is not allowed for more than 15
seconds.
● If engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, please contact the
Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair as soon as
possible.
373
6-8. Jump-starting
To avoid vehicle damage or personal injury due to improper

operation, if you are unsure about how to follow the procedure,
Chery strongly recommends that you seek help from a competent
mechanic or towing service.
WARNING
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear

protective equipments, such as protective safety glasses, when jump
starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle body.
● If battery acid gets on your skin or in your eyes, wash it with large quantities
of water and get medical attention immediately. If possible, continuously
apply water with a sponge or clean bandage on the way to medical office.
● Specified jumper cables should be used.
● Do not leave battery within the reach of children.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the
battery.
● Do not allow anyone near the battery when starting.
CAUTION
Battery voltage used for jump starting should be 12 V. Do not jump start unless
you are sure that the battery voltage is correct. When connecting jumper
cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or drive
belt.
374
Jump-starting Procedures
1. Turn off all unnecessary electrical appliances. If booster battery is

installed in another vehicle, make sure no contact between
vehicles.
CAUTION
If engine in vehicle with booster battery is not running, start and run it for
several minutes. When jump-starting, depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
375
2. Connect cables in order shown in illustration below.
OMT15-9908
Connect clamp of positive (red) jumper cable to positive (+)

terminal of discharged battery.
Connect clamp at the other end of positive (red) jumper cable to
positive (+) terminal of booster battery.
Connect clamp of negative (black) jumper cable to negative (-)
terminal of booster battery.
Connect clamp at the other end of negative (black) jumper cable
to negative (-) terminal of discharged battery or a stationary
unpainted metallic point of the vehicle.
CAUTION
● Do not lean the battery when connecting.

● Never allow clamps of jumper cable to contact with each other, or touch
other metal parts of the vehicle.
● Do not connect cable to or near any part that moves when engine cranks.
376
3. Start engine in normal way. After starting, run it for several minutes
by lightly depressing accelerator pedal.
WARNING
Do not touch battery during engine starting.
4. Disconnect cables in reverse order of connection (negative cable

first and then the positive cable).
If cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, please contact
the Chery authorized service station for inspection and repair as soon
as possible.
If the first starting attempt is not successful, check that clamps on
jumper cables are tight and restart the engine in normal way.
If another attempt is still not successful, please contact the Chery
authorized service station for assistance.
377
378
Section 7
CUSTOMER
ASSISTANCE
7-1. Service for Your Vehicle ... 380

Service Arrangements ...... 380
Service List ....................... 380
Service Requests.............. 380
7-2. If You Need Assistance .... 381

Service Satisfaction .......... 381
Service of Chery
Authorized Service
Station........................... 381
7-3. After-Sales Service

Department of Chery
International .................. 382
Contact Method ................ 382
Communicate
Information .................... 383
379
Section 7 CUSTOMER SERVICE
7-1. Service for Your Vehicle
Service Arrangements
If your vehicle needs to be serviced, be sure to have the required

documents with you. Not all the work to be performed is covered by
the warranty. Discuss the additional charges with the service advisor.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can
often provide a clue for resolving the vehicle problems.
Service List
Prepare a written form listing your vehicle's problems or specific work

you want to be done. If you have had an accident or work done that is
not on your maintenance log, always let the service advisor know.
Service Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle back by
the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and
list the items in order of priority.
380
7-2. If You Need Assistance
Service Satisfaction
Chery and its authorized service station are committed to your

satisfaction with their products and service. Your happiness with our
vehicle is very important to us. If a service problem or other difficulty
occurs, we recommend that you take the following actions:
● Discuss the problem with your Chery authorized service station's
advisor. Management personnel at the authorized service station
have professional knowledge to resolve your concerns quickly.
● In the event that you are still not satisfied, talk to the service
manager for resolution.
● If the service station is unable to resolve your concerns, please
contact the after-sales service department of Chery international.
Service of Chery Authorized Service Station
Only OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) parts and materials

can extend your vehicle's service life. Chery Automobile Co., Ltd.
only supplies OEM parts to Chery authorized service station located
worldwide. Therefore, only OEM parts of Chery authorized service
station can be used.
Chery authorized service station is service professional and is 7
exclusively authorized by Chery Automobile Co., Ltd. For vehicle
service, please remember that your authorized service station knows CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
your vehicle best, and has the professional technicians and OEM
parts to satisfy your needs.
381
7-3. After-Sales Service Department of Chery International
Contact Method
≳䗮ֵᙃ
■ English:
The contact information of Chery China headquarter's after-sales

service department:
E-mail: helpdesk@mychery.com
■ Spanish:
La forma de contacto del departamento de servicio de post-venta
de la sede en China de Chery es como lo siguiente:
Correo electrónico: helpdesk@mychery.com
■ Portuguese:
Контактная информация отдела послепродажного
обслуживания в китайском штабе-квартире Chery:
Электронная почта : helpdesk@mychery.com
■ Arabic:
!" #$%&' (&)" %*+) ,&/)" 012 3 4305 678

:9);)" <=>)" 9?A
:9BE%;G)H" 0I%/)"
helpdesk@mychery.com
382
Communicate Information
Any information sent to the after-sales service department of Chery

international should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number
● Owner's e-mail
● Service station name of sale and service
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
* * VIN is located on upper left of
LVVDBXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel and can be
seen from outside through the
windshield.
OMT15-9000
CAUTION
Never cover, paint, weld, cut, drill or remove the vehicle identification number
7
(VIN).
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
● Vehicle's delivery date and current odometer reading
● Service history of your vehicle
● An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under
which it occurs
383
384
Section 8
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES
8-1. Maintenance ..................... 386 Checking Drive Belt

Maintenance Tension ......................... 403
Schedules ..................... 386 Checking Tire Inflation
Airbag System .................. 387 Pressure........................ 403
Checking Tires.................. 405
8-2. Do-it-yourself Tire Rotation ..................... 406
Maintenance.................. 391 Checking Battery .............. 407
Engine Compartment Checking Fuse.................. 407
Overview ....................... 392 Adding Windshield
Engine Compartment Washer Fluid................. 409
Fuse and Relay Box ..... 393 Checking Wiper Blade ...... 409
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacing Wiper Blade ..... 410
and Relay Box .............. 396 Checking and Replacing
Checking Engine Oil Air Conditioning Filter
Level ............................. 398 Element......................... 411
Checking Transmission Replacing Light Bulbs ....... 413
Oil Level ........................ 400 Low/High Beam
Checking Brake Fluid Headlight Manual
Level ............................. 400 Adjustment .................... 418
Checking Coolant
Level ............................. 401 8-3. Vehicle Cleaning and
Checking Power Steering Maintenance.................. 420
Fluid Level
(if equipped) .................. 402 8-4. New Vehicle Break-in ....... 422
Checking Radiator and
Condenser .................... 403
385
Section 8. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8-1. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedules
Service interval for scheduled maintenance is determined by the

odometer reading or time interval, whichever comes first, refer to the
schedule for details. Service interval for each item is noted in the
maintenance schedules.
For details, please refer to "Maintenance Manual".
CAUTION
Failure to perform the required maintenance items according to the mainte-

nance schedules may cause damage to your vehicle.
■ Daily check
● Check the operation of all the exterior and interior lights.
Replace any bulbs that are inoperative or dim, and check that all
the lampshades are clean.
● Check visually for proper tire pressure and tire wear or damage.
■ Monthly check
● Check the engine oil level after stopping the fully warmed engine
for about 5 minutes. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
a level ground will help improve the accuracy of the oil level
reading. Add engine oil only when the level is below "MIN" mark.
● Check the battery. Clean and tighten the battery terminals if nec-
essary.
● Check the levels of coolant, steering fluid (if equipped), washer
fluid and brake fluid and add if necessary.
● Check all the electrical appliances for proper operation.
386
Airbag System
If your vehicle is equipped with airbag system, it must be replaced 10

years after the date of production. Always have it replaced at the
Chery authorized service station.
In order to ensure the proper operation of the airbag system, always
have the airbag system replaced within the specified date at Chery
If the airbags have been replaced before the specified date (such as
after an accident), please fill the replacement record for future refer-
ence.
Airbag System Replacement Record
□ Driver airbag
□ Front passenger airbag
□ Front side airbags (if equipped)
□ Left side air curtain (if equipped)
□ Right side air curtain (if equipped)
□ Airbag control module
□ Airbag harness
□ Pretensioner seat belt (if equipped)
□ Other components
1
2
3
4
5 8
6
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Date
Authorized service station seal:
387

□ Driver airbag
□ Airbag harness
1
2
3
4
5
6
Date
388

□ Driver airbag
□ Airbag harness
1
2
3
4
5
6
Date
8
389

□ Driver airbag
□ Airbag harness
1
2
3
4
5
6
Date
390
8-2. Do-it-yourself Maintenance
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow correct

maintenance procedures given in this section.
This section gives simple instructions only for those maintenance
items that are easy for an owner to perform. However, there are still
many items that must be done by a qualified technician with special
tools.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should
be especially careful to observe.
WARNING
● When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from
engine drive belts and cooling fan.
● Right after driving, engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and cylinder head
cover will be very hot, so never touch them. The cooling fan may
automatically start and run.
● If engine is very hot, do not open coolant reservoir cap to prevent scalding
injury.
● Do not smoke around fuel filler or battery, otherwise it may cause sparks or
open flames, resulting in a fire.
CAUTION
8
● Add coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and steering fluid (if equipped) cor-
rectly to proper levels. If some fluid splashes onto the vehicle, be sure to
immediately wash it off with a wet cloth, to avoid damage to the painted sur-
face.
● Do not overfill engine oil, or it may cause malfunction to the engine.
● Do not drive with the air filter removed, or excessive engine wear could
occur.
● Before closing the hood, check if you have left anything in the engine com-
partment, such as tools, rags, etc.
391
Engine Compartment Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 12 11 10 9 OMT15-9909
Coolant reservoir Engine compartment fuse

Steering fluid reservoir box
(if equipped) Air filter case body
Engine oil filler cap Radiator
Engine oil dipstick Condenser
Transmission oil filler cap Cooling fan
Brake fluid reservoir Washer fluid reservoir
Battery
392
Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box
Engine compartment
fuse and relay box
OMT15-9910
8
393
■ Fuse and relay layout in engine compartment fuse and relay

box
SB11
ER18 ER17 ER16 *
+
30A ER15
Memory fuse
15A
High-speed LOW-speed Starter

cooling fan relay cooling fan relay SB10 TCU relay
relay
25A
EF43 15A
EF42 10A
SB09 SB08 SB07 EF45 30A SB06 SB05 SB04 SB03
40A 40A 40A 30A 30A 20/30A 30A
EF44 15A
SB02 Fuse
Repair Repair EF41 20A
puller EF40 10A
15A ER14 ER10
ER11*
Repair Repair
ER13 ER12 water pump
ACC relay Fuel pump Front fog relay Spare
EF39 25A EF38 10A EF37 15A relay light relay
EF28 7.5A
EF36 25A
EF35 15A
EF34 15A
EF33 25A
EF32 10A
EF31 15A
EF30 25A
EF29 15A
EF27 15A
EF26 15A
EF25 10A
EF24 15A
EF23 10A
EF22 10A
EF21 10A
EF20 15A
EF19 7.5A
EF15 7.5A
EF14 7.5A
EF13 7.5A
EF07 7.5A
EF18 10A
EF17 20A
EF06 20A
EF12 20A
EF11 15A
EF10 10A
EF09 15A
EF08 15A
EF06 10A
EF05 15A
EF04 15A
EF03 15A
EF02 15A
EF01 20A
SB01
30A
ER08* ER07* ER06* ER05* ER04 ER03 ER02 ER01*

ER09 Electronic
fuel pump Low beam High beam Vacuum
Back-up Spare Spare IGN1 relay EMS relay
relay relay relay pump relay
light relay （ISS+CVT）
OMT15-8020
EF47 EF48 EF52 EF49 EF53
60 80 40 150 50
1 3 6 10
OMT15-8021
394
■ Engine compartment fuse description

No. Description No. Description No. Description
LT & PTC water
SB01 Reserve EF12 EF34 BCM 5
pump*
ECU & TCU brake
switch 15+ &
SB02 ACC EF13 reversing sensor & EF35 BCM 3
IPU with hybrid
system
Inner mirror & A/C
SB03 Starter/drive chain EF14 pressure switch & EF36 Reserve*
reversing radar
SB04 TCU/DCT EF15 PEPS & 4WD* EF37 Spare power 2
SB05 BCM 2 EF16 Electronic oil pump* EF38 ECU & TCU 30+
SB06 BCM 1 EF17 Reserve* EF39 Wiper
SB07 ESP/ABS EF18 Back-up light EF40 4WD & IPU
SB08 EPB* EF19 Alternator excitation EF41 Seat heating*
Air conditioning
SB09 ACM/EPB* EF20 Injector EF42
compressor
SB10 ESP/ABS EF21 Reserve EF43 Reserve*
Seat adjustment
SB11 EF22 Water pump* EF44 BCM 4
SEAT*
EF01 Vacuum pump* EF23 POD & PPD & EAC* EF45 Sunroof*
EF02 Oxygen sensor EF24 Horn EF46 Marine insurance
Left headlight high Instrument panel
EF03 Ignition coil 3# EF25 EF47
beam* fuse box power@
Right headlight low
EF04 ECU solenoid valve EF26 EF48 EPS*
beam
EF05 PPD & HVH EF27 Front fog light EF49 Alternator/DC-DC
EF06 Reserve EF28 ESP & ABS & ACM* EF50 - 8
Right headlight high
EF07 EF29 Fuel pump EF51 -
beam
Left headlight low

EF08 EF30 BCM 6 EF52 Low speed fan
beam
EF09 Reserve* EF31 IGN 1* EF53 High speed fan
ECU & fan controller Brake switch &
EF10 EF32 - -
with hybrid system PEPS & DCT 30+
EF11 PEPS* EF33 ACM* - -
395
EF10: ECU & fan controller with hybrid system & start and stop
relay (ERL Y15) coil with start and stop system
EF13: ECU & TCU brake switch 15+ & reversing sensor & IPU
with hybrid system
EF14: Inner mirror & A/C pressure switch & reversing radar
EF32: Brake switch & PEPS & DCT 30+
@: 60A with PEPS/100A without PEPS
*: Options
Instrument Panel Fuse and Relay Box
Instrument panel
fuse and relay box
OMT15-8030
396
■ Fuse and relay layout in instrument panel fuse and relay box
RF01 10A RF02
RR01 RF03 10A RF04

RR02 RR03
Rear
Blower relay
RF05 10A RF06 Spare defroster
relay
RF07 10A RF08
RF15 7.5A
RF09 10A
RF10 10A
RF18 10A
RF12
RF13
RF14
RF16
RF17
RF19
RF11
+
RF21 7.5A
RF22 20A
RF24 30A
RF26 10A
RF27 15A
RF20
RF23
RF25
RF28
30A
OMT15-8040
■ Instrument panel fuse description

No. Description No. Description No. Description
ICM & RAIN
RF01 BCM & ICM RF10 RF19 -
SENSOR
RF02 VTM & RVM RF11 - RF20 BLOWER
RF03 EPS & SAM RF12 BMS FAN RF21 IGN SW1
AVM & BSD & MPC &
RF04 RF13 BMS & HCU RF22 -
MRR
8
RF05 AIRBAG RF14 CCU & RVM RF23 -
DIAGNOSIS & VTM &
RF06 BMS & HCU RF15 RF24 DEFROST

IVS & KEY IN
RF07 SEE NOTE RF16 - RF25 -
RADIO & BCM
RF08 TCU Solenoid RF17 - RF26 MIRROR &
SUNROOF
RADIO & A/C &
RF09 RF18 MIRROR HEATER RF27 CIGAR
T-BOX
397
Checking Engine Oil Level
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
1. Stop vehicle on a level ground after warming up engine. Wait about
5 minutes after turning off engine.
2. Open hood, pull the dipstick
out and wipe it with a clean
cloth.
OMT15-9911
CAUTION
Put a cloth under the end of dipstick to prevent oil spilling onto engine or vehi-
cle body.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go.

4. Pull the dipstick out again and check if oil level is proper.
If oil level is above the "MAX"
mark, drain excessive engine oil.
If oil level is between "MIN" and
"MAX" marks, oil level is proper.
If oil level is at or below the
"MIN" mark, it is necessary to
OMT15-8100 add engine oil.
398
CAUTION
● Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle components.

● After the engine warms up, do not check the oil level immediately, and wait
for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
■ Adding engine oil

1. Open the engine oil filler cap
1
cover.
2. Turn the engine oil filler cap
counterclockwise to open it.
2
OMT15-9912
3. Use the funnel to add a proper amount of engine oil and check
the oil level with a dipstick again.
4. When the level reaches within the correct range, turn the engine
oil filler cap clockwise to tighten it. And install engine oil filler cap
cover.
CAUTION
● Do not overfill oil, or it may cause damage to engine. 8

● Only use the engine oil recommended by Chery. For engine oil capacity and
type, please refer to "Lubrication System" in section 9.

● If replace the engine oil, you should replace the engine oil filter.
Do not discard the waste engine oil and filter in the household rubbish, in the
sewer or on the ground. As it will cause serious environmental pollution.
Please handle it according to the local regulations regarding to environmental
protection.
399
Checking Transmission Oil Level
Checking, adding and replacing of transmission oil should be done by

professionals. Please contact a Chery authorized service station for
service.
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Brake fluid level should be

between the "MIN" and "MAX"
marks. Add brake fluid if the level
reaches the "MIN" mark or
MAX
below.
MIN
OMT15-9902
Check the brake fluid level regularly, if the brake system warning light
comes on, check the brake fluid level immediately.
If you find that the brake fluid leaks, please contact the Chery autho-
rized service station for inspection and repair.
Only use the brake fluid recommended by Chery. For brake fluid
capacity and type, please refer to "Brake System" in section 9.
WARNING
Never allow brake fluid to contact your skin or eyes. If the brake fluid splashes
into your eyes, or on your skin, flush the area immediately with a great quantity
of water. Get emergency medical attention immediately if necessary.
400
CAUTION
● If some brake fluid splashes onto the painted surface of the vehicle body, be
sure to clean it with a wet sponge or wash it off with water to avoid corroding
the parts or painted surface.
● As the brake fluid has high water absorbability, please never leave the brake
fluid reservoir open for a long period of time.
Checking Coolant Level
When the engine is cold, check

that the coolant level is between
the "MAX" and "MIN" mark on
the reservoir. If the level is on or
MAX
MIN
below the "MIN" mark, add cool-

ant to the level of "MAX" line.
OMT15-9906
■ Add coolant
1. Open the coolant reservoir cap, and add coolant to the level of
"MAX" line.
2. Start and run the engine until coolant reaches normal tempera-
ture. Observe the coolant level in the reservoir all the time and
add coolant if the level falls below the "MIN" mark till the coolant 8
level no longer falls down.

CAUTION
If coolant level falls down too fast, check radiator, hose and water pump for
leakage.
3. Turn off engine and check if coolant level is correct after engine
cools down. If it is not correct, repeat above operations until
level is correct.
401
4. Install the coolant reservoir cap securely.

Only use the coolant recommended by Chery. For coolant capacity
and type, please refer to "Cooling System" in section 9.
WARNING
If you have to add coolant when the engine is hot, first loosen the reservoir cap
lightly to release the inner pressure, wait for a moment before fully removing
the cap to prevent the coolant from spaying out and causing scalding injury.
CAUTION
● Do not use coolant of poor quality.

● Do not use coolant of different colors and specifications.
● Be careful not to spray the liquid on any part of the engine when adding cool-
ant.
Checking Power Steering Fluid Level (if equipped)
Power steering fluid level should

be between the "MAX" and "MIN"
marks.
If the level reaches the "MIN"
mark or below, add power steering
fluid.
OMT15-9903
If there is a sign of leakage, abnormal noise or unusual operation,

check if the power steering fluid level is low. If the cause cannot be
found, please contact the Chery authorized service station for inspec-
tion and repair as soon as possible.
Only use the power steering fluid recommended by Chery. For power
steering fluid capacity and type, please refer to "Steering System" in
section 9.
402
Checking Radiator and Condenser
Check if radiator and condenser

are blocked with leaves, dirt or
insects, clean them if necessary.
And check hose connection for
installation condition, corrosion,
etc.
OMT15-9904
Checking Drive Belt Tension
1. Turn off engine (ignition) switch.

2. Twist the belt with your fingers, and check the rotation angle of the
belt.
3. If rotation angle is more than 90°, please contact the Chery
authorized service station for repair and replace.
Checking Tire Inflation Pressure
You should check the tire infla-

(bar) tion pressure at least once a
month (spare tire included).
8
4.2
For provisions about the tire
T15-3903015
2.2 2.2
inflation pressure, please refer to

30kg
225/65R18 100H
50kg 2.5 2.5
the tire pressure label on the
driver side B pillar (it depends on
OMT15-8110
the actual vehicle).
Incorrect tire inflation pressure will lead to excessive fuel consump-
tion, shorten the tire service life and reduce the vehicle stability.
Therefore, you should keep proper tire pressure.
403
WARNING
Make sure to keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following condi-
tions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
Too low Too high Proper ● Poor handling
Side wear Center wear Even wear
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from
overheated tires
OMT15-8120 ● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage
from poor road conditions
CAUTION
● Use a tire pressure gauge to check cold tire inflation pressure. The appear-
ance of a tire may lead a wrong estimate of the tire inflation pressure.
● It is normal that the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Be sure to install tire valve caps properly. Otherwise, dirt could get into the
valve core and cause blockage. If the caps have been lost, install new ones
immediately.
● If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked at the Chery authorized
service station.
404
Checking Tires
Check if there are any nicks, foreign matter and uneven wear on the
tire tread regularly.
Check the tire tread according to
the tread wear indicators. When
tread wears down to its limit,
wear bands will appear on tread.
Appearance of the wear bands
indicates that performance and
safety of the tire seriously
OMT15-8130 decrease, and replacement is
necessary.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to a cut or
other damage, it should be replaced.
CAUTION
If air leakage occurs while driving, do not continue to drive. Driving even a
short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.
Please never discard a disposed tire carelessly. It should be handled according to

the local regulations regarding to environmental protection. 8
405
Tire Rotation
To equalize tire wear and help to

extend tire service life, Chery
recommends that you should
rotate your tires approximately
every 10,000 km (rotate every
Front
5,000 - 7,000 km is the most).
Tire rotation may vary according
OMT15-8141 to your driving habits and road
surface conditions.
For tire replacement procedures, please refer to "Tire Replacement"
in section 6.
CAUTION
Please go to the nearest Chery authorized service station to perform tire rota-
tion for vehicles with tire pressure sensor.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may affect handling perfor-

mance, which may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different manufacturers, models or tread patterns.
● Do not mix tires of remarkably different tread wear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Chery.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
● Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
406
Checking Battery
Battery negative terminal

1
3 Battery positive terminal
Hold-down clamp
Check and make sure that the
battery terminals are not corroded
2
and that there are no loose con-
OMT15-9907
nections, outside cracks, or loose
hold-down clamps.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. Other types
of batteries are not recommended. The new battery should have the
same specifications with the original one. We recommend that you
should go to a Chery authorized service station for battery replace-
ment.
Checking Fuse
If electrical appliances do not work, please check fuses. If the fuses

are blown, they must be replaced.
You can judge whether a fuse is
1 2
in good condition based on illus-
tration.
8
Good Blown
OMT15-8150
407
■ Checking fuses in engine compartment fuse and relay box

1. Turn off all the electrical equipments and engine (ignition)
switch.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Taking off the cover from the engine compartment fuse and relay
box, check suspected fuses based on the layout inside of box
cover.
For fuse and relay layout, you can also refer to "Engine Compart-
ment Fuse and Relay Box" in this section.
■ Checking fuses in instrument panel fuse and relay box
1. Turn off all the electrical equipments and engine (ignition)
switch.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Instrument panel fuse and relay box is located under the driver's
side instrument panel. When checking fuses, remove instrument
panel left lower protector. Check suspected fuses based on fuse
and relay layout.
For fuse and relay layout, please refer to "Instrument Panel Fuse
and Relay Box" in this section.
■ Replacing fuses
For fuse replacement procedures, please refer to "Replacing Fuse"
in section 6.
408
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
If no washer fluid can be sprayed

from washer nozzles, washer res-
ervoir may be empty. At this time,
stop operating washers and add
washer fluid to correct level.
OMT15-9913
CAUTION
Do not use plain water as washer fluid when temperature is below freezing
point. Otherwise, water will be frozen, causing damage to washer.
Checking Wiper Blade
Check the roughness of the

wiper blade on its end using your
finger. Being too rough will pre-
vent the wiper blade from work-
ing effectively.
8
OMT15-8160
CAUTION
● Never operate wipers on dry glass, or glass may be scratched, causing per-
manent damage to wiper blades.
● In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that the wipers are
not frozen to the glass before operating them.
● Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield.
409
Replacing Wiper Blade
■ Replacing front wiper blade

1. Lift front wiper arm.
2. Pull up wiper blade while
1 pressing the hold-down clamp
to remove it.
2 3. Install a new wiper blade in
reverse order, and make sure
the hold-down clamp is locked
OMT15-8180
firmly.
4. Check that front wipers work
properly.
■ Replacing rear wiper blade
1. Lift rear wiper arm.
OMT15-8200
2. Detach the wiper blade by

your hands as shown in pic-
ture.
OMT15-8190
3. Install a new wiper blade in the reverse order, and make sure the
wiper blade is installed in place.
4. Check that rear wipers work properly.
410
Checking and Replacing Air Conditioning Filter Element
Air conditioning filter element is located in back of glove box. Filter

element can prevent outside dust from entering vehicle through air
conditioning outlets. It may be blocked after being used for a long
time. If operational efficiency of air conditioning decreases signifi-
cantly, check filter element and replace it if necessary.
1. Open glove box, use flathead
screwdriver or similar tools to
remove clips from both sides
of glove box.
Remove the damper, which is
connected with the glove box
by using the proper tools.
OMT15-8201
Then remove the glove box.
2. Open filter socket cover, and

remove the filter element.
OMT15-8210
8
3. Check and clean surface of fil-
ter element and replace it if

necessary.
OMT15-8221
411
4. Insert a clean filter element into

socket correctly and install filter
element socket cover securely.
Install glove box in place.
OMT15-8220
CAUTION
● Using air conditioning while filter element is removed may result in degrada-
tion of dustproof performance, affecting efficiency of air conditioning.
● It is recommended to check air conditioning filter every 3 months or 5,000
km at Chery authorized service station, and replace it if necessary.
● Do not wash the filter element with water.
412
Replacing Light Bulbs
■ Front bulb locations
1 2 3
5 4
OMT15-8230
Turn signal light Side turn signal light

Position light Low/high beam headlight
Daytime running light Front fog light
8
413
■ Rear bulb locations
1 2 3
7 6 5 4
OMT15-8240
High mounted stoplight Turn signal light

Position light Rear fog light (if equipped)
Stop light Back-up light
License plate light
When replacing a light bulb, make sure light switch and engine (igni-
tion) switch are turned off.
WARNING
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the bulbs while they are hot.
CAUTION
● Please use the light bulb models recommended by Chery.

● When replacing a bulb, do not touch it with your hands directly. Doing so
may cause bulb to be contaminated and seriously reduce life span of bulb.
414
■ Light bulb model

Nominal Light Source
Light Bulb Name
(Type/Model)
Headlight HB3LL/D8S
Front Position Light LED
Front Turn Signal Light PY/21W
Stoplight LED
Front Fog Light 55W/H7
Rear Fog Light P21W
License Plate Light LED
High Mounted Stoplight LED
Rear Position Light LED
Rear Turn Signal Light P21W
Back-up Light P21W
Side Turn Signal Light LED
Front Interior Light LED
Luggage compartment Light C5W
Courtesy Light LED
■ Replace high/low beam headlight bulb (non-xenon headlight)

1. Remove high/low beam head-
light dust cap.
8
OMT15-8251
2. Turn high/low beam headlight

bulb counterclockwise to
remove it.
OMT15-8450
415
3. Disconnect high/low beam

headlight bulb connector.
OMT15-8460
4. Install the new light bulb in reverse order after replacement.

■ Replacing front turn signal light bulb
1. Turn light socket counterclock-
wise to remove it.
OMT15-8252
2. Remove light bulb from light

socket.
OMT15-8300
3. Install the new light bulb in reverse order after replacement.
416
■ Replacing luggage compartment light bulb

1. Pry out the light cover using a
flathead screwdriver wrapped
with tape.
OMT15-8430
2. Remove the bulb.
OMT15-8440
3. Install the light bulb in reverse order after replacement.

■ Other lights
1. High mounted stoplight is LED light, please go to a Chery autho-
rized service station for overall replacement after damage.
2. Interior light is LED light, please go to a Chery authorized ser-
vice station for overall replacement after damage. 8
3. License plate light is LED light, please go to a Chery authorized
service station for overall replacement after damage.

4. Atmosphere light is LED light, please go to a Chery authorized
5. Vanity mirror light is LED light, please go to a Chery authorized
417
Low/High Beam Headlight Manual Adjustment
When adjusting headlight low/high beam, insert the screwdriver into

the required adjustment hole, and turn it clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
■ Adjustment method for left headlight
1 Up/down adjustment
Turn screwdriver clockwise: Light
beam moves upward
Turn screwdriver counterclock-
wise: Light beam moves down-
ward
2
Left/right adjustment
beam moves to right
OMT15-8400
wise: Light beam moves to left
■ Adjustment method for right headlight
1 Up/down adjustment
beam moves upward
wise: Light beam moves down-
ward
2
Left/right adjustment
beam moves to left
OMT15-8380
wise: Light beam moves to right
418
WARNING
It is directly related to driving safety if adjustment of headlight beam is correct.

Therefore, it is only allowed to adjust light beam by using special instrument,
please pay attention to legal rules. Always adjust headlight beam at the Chery
authorized service station if no emergency.
8
419
8-3. Vehicle Cleaning and Maintenance
■ Automatic car wash

Only cold or lukewarm water can be used to wash vehicle. When
washing with high pressure water in a car wash station, the power-
ful water may spray into the vehicle.
CAUTION
Before washing the vehicle automatically, please turn off the air conditioning
system, all window glass and sunroof (if equipped).
■ Manual car wash

If washing liquid is used, rinse with large amount of plain water
after applying the liquid evenly, and wipe the vehicle with a cloth.
CAUTION
● Please never wash your car with a water jet aimed at the engine or engine
compartment.
● After washing the vehicle, depress the brake pedal for several times to clear
up the water in the brake disc.
● If you often drive the vehicle on dusty roads, it is recommended that the
chassis should be washed at least once a month.
■ Leather upholstery cleaning

Wipe leather surfaces with a damp cotton cloth or towel and dry it
with a clean, soft cloth. For extremely dirty surfaces, use neutral
cleaners such as soap foaming cleaner.
It is recommended that the leather specific curing compound
should be used for leather maintenance every 6 months during
normal use.
CAUTION
Do not make the leather too wet, and take special care not to let water enter
the gaps.
420
■ Headlights cleaning
Please use professional chemical solvents to clean the headlight.
Do not wipe the light when it is dry, and avoid cleaning the lens
with sharp objects. Do not use a water jet to wash rear part of
lights, preventing water entering and damaging lights.
■ Rear windshield cleaning
When cleaning rear windshield glass, only use a soft cloth for wip-
ing to avoid damaging rear windshield defroster. Do not clean the
rear windshield glass with solvents or sharp objects.
■ Maintenance of wheel and wheel ornament
All the wheels should be cleaned with mild soap water regularly to
prevent corrosion. Do not wash with harsh brushes, or it will dam-
age the protective surface of the wheel.
■ Chassis anti-corrosion
The vehicle chassis has undergone anti-corrosion treatment.
Check the anti-corrosion protection regularly, and go to the Chery
authorized service station for repair if necessary.
■ Paint surface maintenance
Wax your vehicle painted surfaces once or twice a year will help to
keep them smooth.
For painted surface damages or mini abrasions resulting from road
gravel, please go to the Chery authorized service station for treat-
ment. 8
CAUTION
To protect vehicle painted surface, timely remove the things that are harmful to
the paint surface, such as birds droppings, resin, insect residue, oil stains, etc.
421
8-4. New Vehicle Break-in
■ Engine break-in recommendations:

Within the first 1,000 km:
● It is forbidden to drive at full speed;
● The vehicle speed should not be more than 100 km/h;
● Avoid driving at full speed in each gear.
Within the first 1,000 - 1,500 km:
● Driving speed can be gradually increased to its maximum;
● Engine speed can be gradually increased to its maximum.
CAUTION
● Avoid running engine at unnecessary high speed (Maximum speed which

engine allows to run is 6,000 r/min in short time). Switching early to a high
gear is a good way to save fuel and reduce operational noise and environ-
mental pollution.
● When engine is cold, do not run the engine at its maximum speed whether in
neutral or in other driving gears.
■ Tire and wheel break-in recommendations:

New tires require a short time to break-in. When starting to use, the
best adhesion is not available. Therefore, your vehicle should be
driven slowly and carefully within the first 100 km.
■ Braking system break-in recommendations:
The brakes cannot provide the ideal friction to brake during the
vehicle's first 200 km. You should depress the brake pedal firmly to
increase friction and improve braking capability. This condition also
applies to the each replacement of braking lining.
Wheel bolts must be retightened to the specified torque (130 ± 10
N•m) after the first 800 km of driving. In addition, when wheel bolts
need to be tightened in the repair process, they must be retight-
ened to specified torque after driving 800 km.
422
Section 9
VEHICLE
SPECIFICATIONS
9-1. Vehicle Identification

Number ......................... 424
9-2. Vehicle Specifications....... 427

Vehicle Model and Type ... 427
Vehicle Dimensions .......... 428
Vehicle Weight.................. 429
Vehicle Performance ........ 430
Engine Performance ......... 431
Continuously Variable
Transmission................. 432
Manual Transmission........ 433
Double Clutch
Transmission................. 433
Fuel System...................... 434
Lubrication System ........... 435
Cooling System................. 436
Ignition System ................. 436
Suspension System .......... 436
Steering System ............... 437
Brake System ................... 437
Wheel Alignment............... 438
Tires and Wheels.............. 438
Fluid Capacity ................... 439
Battery .............................. 439
423
Section 9. Vehicle Specifications
9-1. Vehicle Identification Number
* * VIN is located on upper left of

LVVDBXXXXXXXXXXXX
driver side instrument panel, and
can be seen from the outside
through the windshield.
OMT15-9000
VIN is stamped on right of engine

compartment drip channel stiffen-
ing beam.
LVVDBXXXXXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9915
VIN is located on hood as shown in

* * the illustration.
LVVDBXXXXXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9914
VIN is located on back door as

shown in the illustration.
LVVDBXXXXXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9041
424
CAUTION
It is forbidden to damage the vehicle identification number (VIN) or areas

around it (such as cover, paint, weld, cut, drill or remove).
Vehicle nameplate is located on

B pillar of right front door.
OMT15-9010
Engine number (1.5TCI) is located

on engine block as shown in the
illustration.
* * *
SQRE4T15 XXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9051
Engine number (2.0) is located

on engine block as shown in the
illustration.
* * *
SQRD4G20 XXXXXXXXX
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
OMT15-9050
425
Transmission number (for 6MT

model) is stamped on transmis-
sion case.
621MHA
XXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9022
Transmission number (for 6DCT

model) is stamped on front side
of transmission case.
625DHA
XXXXXXXXX
OMT15-9024
Transmission number (for CVT

QR019CHA model) is stamped on the trans-
XXXXXXXXX
mission case, close to the trans-
mission oil dipstick.
OMT15-9030
426
9-2. Vehicle Specifications
Vehicle Model and Type
The vehicle model and type are as shown in table 1.

Table 1 Vehicle Model and Type
Model 1.5TCI 2.0

4 × 2 front-wheel drive, Front-wheel steering, Transverse front-
Vehicle Type engine, Two-box, Five-door, Five-seat,
Unibody, Left-hand drive
Engine Model SQRE4T15/SQRE4T15B SQRD4G20
Vertical, 4-cylinder inline,
Vertical, 4-cylinder inline, Water-
Water-cooled, 4-stroke, Dou- cooled, 4-stroke, Double over-
Engine Type ble overhead camshaft, Vari-
head camshaft, Variable valve
able valve timing (VVT),
timing (VVT)
Turbocharging, Intercooler
Fuel Supply Type Multiport sequential electronic fuel injection
Transmission Model 621MHA, 625DHA QR019CHA
9
427
Vehicle Dimensions
Overall height
Front Wheel base Rear Front tread
overhang overhang
Overall width
Overall length Rear tread

OMT15-9060
The major dimension parameters for the vehicle are as shown in table 2.
Table 2 Major Dimension Parameters for Vehicle
Model 1.5TCI + 6MT 1.5TCI + 6DCT 2.0 + CVT

Length (mm) 4470 4470 4505
Overall Size Width (mm) 1837
Height (mm) 1670
Wheel Base (mm) 2670
Front (mm) 1550
Tread
Rear (mm) 1550
Front Overhang
888 888 912
(mm)
Overhang
Rear Overhang
912 912 923
(mm)
428
Vehicle Weight
The weight parameters and seating capacity for the vehicle are as
shown in table 3.
Table 3 Weight Parameters and Seating Capacity for Vehicle
Items Parameters
Model 1.5TCI + 6MT 1.5TCI + 6DCT 2.0 + CVT
Vehicle Curb Weight (kg) 1390 1432 1432
Vehicle Curb Front Axle (kg) 811 837 837
Axle Weight Rear Axle (kg) 579 595 595
Manufacturer Maximum Loaded
375
Weight (Including Passengers) (kg)
Manufacturer Maximum Total
1765 1807 1807
Weight (kg)
Manufacturer Front Axle (kg) 914 940 940
Maximum Total
Rear Axle (kg) 851 867 867
Axle Weight
Weight During Driving (kg) 1465 1570 1570
Axle Weight Dis- Front Axle (kg) 846 872 872
tribution During
Driving Rear Axle (kg) 619 635 635
Manufacturer Front Axle (kg) 1600

Maximum Allow-
Rear Axle (kg) 1600
able Axle Weight
Seating Capacity (Including Driver)
5
(Person)
9
429
Vehicle Performance
The major performance indexes (parameters) for the vehicle are as

shown in table 4.
Table 4 Major Performance Indexes (Parameters) for Vehicle
Items Parameters
Model 1.5TCI 2.0
Minimum Ground Clearance (mm) 160
Ground Clearance Between Axles
177
(mm)
Ground Clearance Under Front Axle
178
(mm)
Ground Clearance Under Rear Axle
175
Passing (mm)
Performance Minimum Turning Right Turn (m) 11.0
Diameter Left Turn (m) 11.0
Approach Angle (°) 25
Departure Angle (°) 30
Unloaded (°) 22
Ramp Angle Fully Loaded
19
(°)
Power Maximum Vehicle Speed (km/h) 185 170
Performance Maximum Gradeability (%) 45 45
430
Engine Performance
The structure characteristics, parameters and major performance

indexes for the engine are as shown in table 5.
Table 5 Engine Performance Parameters

Vertical, 4-cylinder inline, Vertical, 4-cylinder inline,
Water-cooled, 4-stroke, Double Water-cooled, 4-stroke, Double
Engine Type
overhead camshaft, Turbo- overhead camshaft, Variable
charging, Intercooler valve timing (VVT)
Cylinder Bore Diameter
77 83.5
(mm)
Piston Stroke (mm) 80.5 90
Displacement (mL) 1498 1971
Compression Ratio 9.5:1 10.5:1
Power Rating (kW) 112 90
Rated Power Speed
5500 5550
(r/min)
Maximum Net Power
112 90
(kW)
Maximum Net Power
5550 5550
Speed (r/min)
Maximum Torque (N•m) 205 180
Maximum Torque
2000 - 4000 4000
Speed (r/min)
9
431
Continuously Variable Transmission
The transmission model is QR019CHA. The transmission gear ratio

conforms to specifications listed in table 6.
Table 6 Gear Ratio
Transmission Model QR019CHA

Transmission Type CVT
Arrangement Form Transverse, front wheel drive
Center Distance (mm) 204
Maximum Input Torque
190
(N•m)
Final Reduction Gear
5.141
Ratio
Transmission Total
5.773
Gear Ratio
Minimum Drive Ratio 0.427
Minimum Final Drive
0.427
Ratio
Minimum Total Gear
2.195
Ratio
Maximum Drive Ratio 2.465
Maximum Final Drive
2.465
Ratio
Maximum Total Gear
12.673
Ratio
432
Manual Transmission
The manual transmission model is 621MHA. The transmission gear

ratio conforms to specifications listed in table 7.
Table 7 Gear Ratio
Transmission Model 621MHA

1st Gear 3.538
2nd Gear 1.913
3rd Gear 1.310
4th Gear 0.971
Shift position 5th Gear 0.818
6th Gear 0.619
Reverse Gear 3.333
Final Reduction Gear
4.562
Ratio
Double Clutch Transmission
The transmission model is 625DHA. The transmission gear ratio con-

forms to specifications listed in table 8.
Table 8 Gear Ratio
Transmission Model 625DHA

1st Gear 4.214
2nd Gear 2.238
3rd Gear 1.302
4th Gear 1.021
Shift position 5th Gear 0.907
6th Gear 0.702
Reverse Gear 3.487
Final Reduction Gear 1/2/5/6 gear: 4.158 9
Ratio 3/4/R gear: 4.648
433
Fuel System
The fuel system parameters are as shown in table 9.

Table 9 Fuel System
SQRE4T15/
Engine Model SQRD4G20
SQRE4T15B
Unleaded gasoline with an octane number
Fuel Type
of 92 or higher
Octane Number Octane Number 92 or higher
Type Plastic fuel tank
Fuel Tank
Capacity 57 L
Fuel Pump Electric fuel pump
■ Fuel selection
Only use the fuel with the grade described in the table or higher.
CAUTION
● Use the low grade fuel will cause damage to the engine.
● Use only unleaded gasoline. Use leaded gasoline will cause the three-way
catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and emission control system to
function improperly.
434
Lubrication System
The lubrication system parameters are as shown in table 10.

Table 10 Lubrication System Parameters

Oil Capacity (Drain and
4 ± 0.5 L 4 ± 0.5 L
Refill)
Summer: SAE 10W-40
(SM grade or higher) Summer: SAE 10W-40 (SM
Winter: SAE 5W-40 grade or higher)
Oil Grade
(SM grade or higher) Winter: SAE 5W-40 (SM grade
Summer and winter: SM 5W-30 or higher)
(SM grade or higher)
■ Oil selection
The 5W in 5W-40 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of engine in cold weather.
The 40 in 5W-40 indicates the viscosity of the oil when the oil is at
operation temperature. Oils with a higher viscosity may be better
suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme
load conditions.
CAUTION
● Please use the engine oil that meets the specifications and requirements
above, or it will cause damage to the engine.
● Do not exceed high oil level mark on oil dipstick when refilling the engine oil.
● Do not use additional additives, otherwise it will cause damage to the
engine. 9
435
Cooling System
The cooling system parameters are as shown in table 11.

Table 11 Cooling System
Model 1.5TCI + 6DCT 1.5TCI + 6MT 2.0

Radiator Type Tube belt radiator
Coolant capacity: 9.0 ± 0.5 L, Coolant capacity: 7.5 ± 0.5 L,
Component: soft water and Component: soft water and
Coolant anti-freeze concentrate, 47:53 G11 additive, 47:53 (volume
(volume ratio), Anti-freeze ratio), Anti-freeze capability:
capability: -40°C -40°C
Ignition System
The model of spark plugs are as shown in table 12.

Table 12 Spark Plugs Model
Spark Plugs Model 3707AAG FR7DTC
CAUTION
● Use the spark plug with specified model.

● Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Suspension System
The types of suspension system are as shown in table 13.

Table 13 Suspension system
Model 1.5TCI 2.0

Macpherson type independent suspension, Unadjustable height,
Front Suspension Column coil spring, Double adjustable shock absorber,
w/ performance rod
Multi-link type independent suspension, Unadjustable height,
Rear Suspension Column coil spring, Double adjustable shock absorber,
w/ performance rod
436
Steering System
The types of steering system are as shown in table 14.

Table 14 Steering System
Model 1.5TCI 2.0

Steering Wheel Diameter (mm) 374.5
Hydraulic boost/
Type of Steering Assist Electric boost
Electric boost
Steering Gear Type Rack & pinion steering gear
Fluid type: ATF III,
add fluid to level
Steering Fluid -
between "MAX" and
"MIN" marks
Adjustable, energy-absorbing steering
Steering Column Type
column
Steering Wheel Up-down (mm) 34
Adjustable Range Front-back (mm) 0
Maximum Steering
38.68°
Angle to Left
Number of Steering
1.5 Turns
Wheel Turns to Left
Wheel Limit Position Maximum Steering
38.68°
Angle to Right
Number of Steering
Wheel Turns to 1.5 Turns
Right
Brake System
The brake system parameters are as shown in table 15.

Table 15 Brake System
Model 1.5TCI 2.0 9

Front Wheel Disc brake
Brake
Rear Wheel Disc-drum brake

Brake Booster Vacuum booster
Mechanical cable type, acting on rear
Parking Brake
wheels
Fluid type: DOT-4, add fluid to level between
Brake Fluid
"MAX" and "MIN" marks
437
Wheel Alignment
The wheel alignment parameters are as shown in table 16.

Table 16 Wheel Alignment Parameters (Unloaded)
Items Parameters
Model 1.5TCI 2.0
Camber -0°25' ± 45'
Caster 4°14' ± 60'
Front Wheel
Kingpin Angle 11°30' ± 60'
Toe-in 0°5' ± 5' (Signal side)
Camber -0°42' ± 30'
Rear Wheel
Toe-in 0°5' ± 10' (Signal side)
Tires and Wheels
Tire and wheel sizes, tire inflation pressure and tightening torque of
wheel bolt are as shown in table 17.
Table 17 Tire and Wheel Sizes, Tire Inflation Pressure and Tightening Torque of Wheel Bolt
Model 1.5TCI 2.0
Tire Size 225/60R18, 225/55R19
Wheel Size 18 × 6½J/19 × 7J
Cold Tire Inflation Front Wheel 230
Pressure (kPa) Rear Wheel 230
(Unloaded) Spare Tire 420
Tightening Torque of Wheel Bolt 130 ±10 N•m
438
Fluid Capacity
Other fluid capacity and type are as shown in table 18.

Table 18 Fluid Capacity and Type
Name Capacity Brand/Type

QR019CHA 8.0 ± 0.2 L ATF SP-III
Transmission Oil 621MHA 2.5 ± 0.1 L FUCHS, GL-4, 75W-90
625DHA 1.2 ± 0.1 L Castrol BOT350M3
Cleaning concentrate and water,
Washer Fluid 2L
1:20 (volume ratio)
Battery
The battery type is as shown in table 19.

Table 19 Battery
Model 1.5TCI 2.0

Battery Type 12 V, 60 Ah
9
439
440
INDEX
Alphabetical Index
A A/C Switch ......................... 289, 300 Charging System Warning

ABS Braking .............................. 181 Light ......................................... 68
ABS Warning Light .............. 73, 182 Checking and Replacing Air
Adding Windshield Washer Conditioning Filter
Fluid ....................................... 409 Element.................................. 411
Adjusting Set Speed .................. 189 Checking Battery ....................... 407
Adjusting Steering Wheel .......... 101 Checking Brake Fluid Level....... 400
After Starting Engine.................. 212 Checking Coolant Level............. 401
After Starting.............................. 155 Checking Drive Belt Tension ..... 403
Air Conditioning Interface Checking Engine Oil Level ........ 398
Display Button ................ 281, 295 Checking Exhaust System......... 216
Air Outlets Airflow Control.......... 291 Checking Fuse........................... 407
Air Volume Adjustment Knob..... 298 Checking Power Steering Fluid
Airbag Precautions .................... 127 Level (if equipped) ................. 402
Airbag System SRS ................... 124 Checking Radiator and
Airbag System ........................... 387 Condenser ............................. 403
Antenna Location and Effective Checking Tire Inflation
Range....................................... 87 Pressure................................. 403
Audio Control Panel................... 230 Checking Tires........................... 405
AUTO Switch ............................. 279 Checking Transmission Oil
Automatic Air Conditioning Level ...................................... 400
System (if equipped) .............. 277 Checking Wiper Blade ............... 409
Child Restraint Systems with
B Battery ....................................... 439 a Top Strap ............................ 144
Before Starting Engine............... 211 Cleaning Parking Sensor........... 204
Blower Governer Switch ............ 286 Cloudrive Interconnection
Brake Fluid................................. 175 Operating Method .................. 258
Brake System Warning Light ..... 176 Cloudrive Interconnection.......... 253
Brake System Warning Common Questions of
Light/EBD Malfunction Cloudrive Interconnection ...... 264
Indicator ................................... 72 Communicate Information ......... 383
Brake System ............................ 437 Communication.......................... 247
Brake ......................................... 174 Contact Method ......................... 382
Continuously Variable
C Camera Distribution ................... 205 Transmission.......................... 432
Cooling System ......................... 436
Canceling/Resuming Cruise
Correct Use of Seat Belt............ 114
Control.................................... 190
Courtesy Light (if equipped) ...... 329
Card Slots .................................. 342
Cruise Indicator ........................... 75
Carrying Passengers ................. 215
CVT Configure Overview............. 38
Center Console Storage Box ..... 341
441
INDEX
D Daytime Running Light EPC Warning Light ...................... 70

Indicator ................................... 69 ESP OFF Indicator ...................... 74
Daytime Running Lights............. 325 ESP OFF Switch........................ 184
DCT Configure Overview............. 40 ESP Warning Light .............. 74, 183
Door Locks................................... 94 Exhaust Gas .............................. 216
Door Storage Boxes .................. 343
Double Clutch Transmission...... 433 F Fail-safe Mode........................... 169
Downshifting .............................. 172 Fastening and Releasing
Driver Airbag and Front Seat Belt ................................ 116
Passenger Airbag................... 125 Fixing hook ................................ 346
Driver Information Center ............ 48 Fluid Capacity............................ 439
Driver Seat Belt Reminder FM ............................................. 236
Light ......................................... 72 Fog Lights.................................. 325
Driving on Road Covered with Front Defrosting Button ............. 282
Ice and Snow ......................... 222 Front Defrosting Button ............. 296
Driving Through Water............... 219 Front Doorsill Light
DUAL Switch.............................. 283 (if equipped) ........................... 329
Front Fog Light Indicator ............. 69
E ECO/Sport Mode .......................168 Front Passenger Seat Belt
Electric Air Conditioning Control Reminder Light
Interface on Audio (if equipped) ............................. 74
Head Unit ............................... 294 Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
Electric Air Conditioning (if equipped) ........................... 119
System ................................... 294 Front Seats ................................ 312
Electric Power Steering Front Washers Operation
System Warning Light Instructions............................. 309
(if equipped) ............................. 75 Front Wipers Operation
Electric Steering Column Lock Instructions............................. 307
(for MT Model)........................ 152 Fuel Gauge.................................. 46
Emergency Towing .................... 366 Fuel System............................... 434
Engine (Ignition) Switch ............... 80
Engine Compartment Fuse and G Gear Position
Relay Box............................... 393 Description ..................... 159, 164
Engine Compartment Gear Shifting.............................. 171
Overview ................................ 392 Glasses Box .............................. 344
Engine Coolant Temperature Glove Box .................................. 341
Gauge ...................................... 46
Engine Immobilizer System ......... 97 H Head Restraints......................... 316
Engine Malfunction Warning
Headlight Combination
Light ......................................... 70
Switch .................................... 320
Engine Performance .................. 431
442
INDEX
Headlight High Beam Low/High Beam Headlight

Indicator ................................... 69 Manual Adjustment ................ 418
Headlight Leveling ..................... 327 Lubrication System .................... 435
High Coolant Temperature Luggage Compartment Light ..... 330
Warning Light ........................... 69 Luggage Compartment
High Temperature Warning ....... 195 Storage Boxes ....................... 346
Hill Hold Control System Luggage Compartment.............. 345
(HHC) ..................................... 185 Luggage Stowage
Hydraulic Brake Assist System Precautions ............................ 348
(HBA) ..................................... 185
M Maintenance of Seat Belt .......... 115
I Ignition System .......................... 436 Maintenance Schedules ............ 386
Index ............................................ 26 Manual Transmission ................ 433
Inside Rear View Mirror ............. 303 Mode Switch ...................... 286, 299
Installation of Child Restraint Modification and Disposal of
with Anchors (ISO-FIX Child Airbag System
Restraint System)................... 143 Components........................... 130
Installation with Three-point MT Configure Overview............... 42
Type Seat Belt........................ 134 Multimedia ................................. 238
Installing Towing Eyelet ............. 368
Instructions for Use.................... 201
N Normal Starting Procedure ........ 154
Instrument Panel Fuse and
Relay Box............................... 396
Interior Lights ............................. 328
O OFF Switch........................ 283, 297
Opening Back Door ..................... 91
Operating Procedure ................. 188
J Jump-starting Procedures.......... 375
Operation Precautions....... 177, 179
Operations for Parking............... 213
L Left/Right Temperature Owner Registration
Adjustment Knob.................... 284 Certificate................................. 30
Local View of Rear Area ............ 210 Outside/Recirculated Air Mode
Locking and Unlocking Doors Button..................................... 300
with the Mechanical Key .......... 91 Outside/Recirculated Air Mode
Locking and Unlocking Doors Switch .................................... 290
with Wireless Remote
Control Function....................... 90
P "Person-to-Person" Advisory
Locking Vehicle.......................... 215
Service ..................................... 32
Loss of Brake Effectiveness ...... 178
Parking Brake Indicator ............... 76
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Parking Brake ............................ 173
Warning Light ........................... 71
Parking on Slope ....................... 214
Low Fuel Level Warning Light ..... 75
Parking Sensor Assistant
Low Pressure Warning .............. 194
System (4-sensor).................. 196
443
INDEX
Parking Sensor Assistant Seat Belt Usage and

System (8-sensor) Precautions for Pregnant
(if equipped) ........................... 198 Women................................... 121
PAS Switch ................................ 199 Seat Storage Bag ...................... 344
Pictorial Index .............................. 26 Service Arrangements ............... 380
Position Light Indicator ................ 70 Service List ................................ 380
Power Outside Rear View Service of Chery Authorized
Mirror...................................... 304 Service Station....................... 381
Power Steering Fluid ................. 186 Service Requests ...................... 380
Power Windows ......................... 102 Service Satisfaction ................... 381
Precautions for Installing Shifting Hints ............................. 171
Child Restraint System Simple Checks........................... 372
on Front Passenger Seat ....... 142 Situations Unsuitable for
Precautions When Using Air Cruise Control ........................ 191
Conditioning System .............. 301 Smart Key.................................... 81
Preparation Before Starting ....... 154 Speedometer ............................... 45
Preparation for Jacking Up SRS Warning Light .............. 72, 123
Vehicle ................................... 353 Starting a Flooded Engine ......... 372
Starting and Stopping Engine
R Rear Center Seat Belt................ 118 in an Emergency .................... 156
Rear Door Child-protection Static/Dynamic Reverse
Locks........................................ 96 Guideline................................ 209
Rear Fog Light Indicator .............. 69 Steering System ........................ 437
Rear Seats................................. 315 Steering Wheel Quick
Rear Washer Operation Buttons................................... 276
Instructions............................. 310 Storage Box (without Seat
Rear Wiper Operation Heating) ................................. 342
Instructions............................. 310 Storage Box Tray....................... 342
Replace Smart Key Battery ......... 83 Stow Rear Seat Belt Buckles..... 119
Replacing Light Bulbs ................ 413 Switching One-sided and
Replacing Wiper Blade .............. 410 Surrounding View................... 207
Required Tools and Supported File Formats ............. 265
Spare Tire .............................. 352 Suspension System................... 436
Roof Carrier (if equipped) .......... 346 System Malfunction Warning..... 193
System Setting .......................... 269
S Seat Belt Reminder Light........... 113
Seat Belt Shoulder Anchor T Table of Contents ........................ 26
Height Adjuster Tachometer ................................. 45
(Front Seats) .......................... 117 Temperature Adjustment
Seat Belt Usage and Knob....................................... 299
Precautions for Children......... 121
444
INDEX
Three-dimensional Left/Right W Wheel Alignment ....................... 438

Side View ............................... 208 When Driving on Slippery
Three-dimensional Road Surfaces ....................... 218
Surrounding Roaming ............ 208 When Driving ............................. 213
Ticket Holder.............................. 344 Window Lock Switch.................. 107
Time and Overspeed Alarm Winter Driving Tips .................... 221
Settings .................................... 66
Tire Chains ................................ 223
Tire Pressure Malfunction
Indicator (if equipped) .............. 76
Tire Replacement ...................... 353
Tire Rotation .............................. 406
Tires and Wheels.......................438
Towing Precautions ................... 364
TPMS Display ............................ 192
Traction Control System
(TCS)...................................... 185
Transmission Malfunction
Warning Light (DCT/CVT
Model) ...................................... 76
Turn Signal Indicator.................... 71
Turn signal lights........................ 324
Turning Off Engine..................... 155
Turning On and Off Panoramic
View Monitor System ............. 206
Type of Three-point Seat
Belts ....................................... 116
Types of Child Restraint
System ................................... 131
V Vacuum Booster ........................ 175

Vehicle Anti-theft System............. 97
Vehicle Delivery Card .................. 28
Vehicle Dimensions ................... 428
Vehicle Model and Type ............ 427
Vehicle Performance ................. 430
Vehicle Weight........................... 429
445
INDEX
446

Chery T15 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chery T15 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOREWORD

Thank you very much for purchasing a new Chery vehicle!

Section 1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................25

Section 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL..........................................37

Section 3 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS.............................79

Section 4 STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE.................147

Section 5 FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .......................227

Section 6 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY .........................349

Section 7 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................379

Section 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ..........................385

Section 9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS..............................423

Time and Overspeed Alarm

2-3. Warning Lights and

Seat Belt Usage and 4-2. Starting Engine.................... 154

Parking on Slope .................214 System Setting .................... 269

5-4. Rear View Mirror..................303 5-9. Power Outlet ....................... 331

5-6. Seats....................................312 5-15. Storage Space .................... 341

Roof Carrier 6-8. Jump-starting ...................... 374

8-3. Vehicle Cleaning and INDEX 9

Front washer nozzle P. 309

Panoramic moon roof* P. 337

Radar sensor* P. 198

Hood P. 108 Fuel filler cap P. 110

Front camera* P. 205

Rear window defroster P. 302 Position light P. 414

High mounted stoplight P. 414 Stop light P. 414

Rear wiper P. 410

Back door switch P. 86

Monitor camera* P. 206

Reversing Back-up light P. 414

A/C center outlet P. 291

Audio quick buttons P. 276 Front passenger

Cup holder P. 334 Glove box P. 341

Parking brake lever P. 173 Power outlet P. 331

Ashtray P. 332 Storage box tray P. 342

Engine (ignition) switch P. 150

Steering wheel adjustment lever P. 101

A/C center outlet P. 291

Audio quick buttons P. 276 Front passenger

Cup holder P. 334 Glove box P. 341

Parking brake lever P. 173 Power outlet P. 331

Ashtray P. 332 Storage box tray P. 342

Shift lever P. 170

Steering wheel adjustment lever P. 101

A/C center outlet P. 291

Audio quick buttons P. 276 Front passenger

Cup holder P. 334 Glove box P. 341

Parking brake lever P. 173 Power outlet P. 331

Ashtray P. 332 Storage box tray P. 342

Engine (ignition) switch P. 150

Steering wheel adjustment lever P. 101

Hazard light switch P. 350 Bluetooth telephone button P. 247

Horn switch P. 100 A/C side

Card slot P. 342 Inside temperature

A For automatic air conditioning system*

Volume adjustment knob P. 232

ECO/Sport Mode P. 168 Power button P. 232

Volume adjustment knob P. 232

ECO/Sport mode P. 168 Power button P. 232

Rear left power

Power door lock

Rear right power

PAS switch* P. 199

Rear view mirror folding switch* P. 305